Lenze 8400 topline c инструкция на русском

• Page 1
  Inverters 8400 E84AVHCxxxxx… Inverter Drives 8400 HighLine C Reference manual _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _…
• Page 2
   SW 8400 BaseLine/StateLine/HighLine/TopLine  chapter «Commissioning»  chapter «Diagnostics & error management»  Remote maintenance manual Networking  KHB for the communication medium used Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 3: Table Of Contents

  Commissioning wizard 8400 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _…

• Page 4
  Load Lenze setting _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _…
• Page 5
  Torque control with speed limitation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 6
  5.16 Internal status signals | System block «LS_DeviceMonitor» _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 7
  Basic signal flow _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 8
  Analog comparison _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 9
  Homing on the fly _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 10
  LED status displays of the device status _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 11
  Setting the node address _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 12
  13.1 Internal interfaces | System block «LS_SyncManagement» _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 13
  15.2 Parameter list _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 15.3 Overview of all parameters with power-related Lenze setting _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1157 15.4 Selection list — analog signals _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _…
• Page 14
  Physical state variables _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1272 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 15
  17.1.65 L_Counter_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1328 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 16
  17.1.101 L_LimitPhi_3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1404 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 17
  17.1.133 L_Or5_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1460 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 18
  17.1.169 L_Transient_5 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1525 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 19
  Port block «LP_CanOut4» _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1562 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 20
  Your opinion is important to us _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1589 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 21: About This Documentation

  »Engineer«.  Tip! Information and tools regarding the Lenze products can be found on the Internet: http://www.lenze.com  Download Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 22: Document History

  Extended by new functions for 8400 HighLine C V11.00.00 02/2011 TD05 Error corrections & supplements 11/2010 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 HighLine C V06.00.00 and V10.00.00 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 23: Conventions Used

  Step-by-step instructions are indicated by a pictograph.  All information that only applies to or from a certain software version of the inverter is marked accordingly in this documentation. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 24: Terminology Used

  Abbreviation for «function block editor». Graphic interconnection tool which is available in the »Engineer« for function block interconnections on the FB Editor. Working with the FB Editor Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 25
  Data are exchanged between the PC (USB connection) and the inverter (diagnostic interface on the front) via the diagnostic adapter. Order designation: E94AZCUS VFCplus Abbreviation for Voltage Frequency Control Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 26: Definition Of The Notes Used

  Application notes Pictograph Signal word Meaning Note! Important note to ensure trouble-free operation  Tip! Useful tip for easy handling  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 27: Introduction: Parameterising The Inverter

  Certain device commands or settings which may cause critical states of drive behaviour constitute exceptions. Such parameter changes are only possible if the inverter is inhibited. Otherwise, a corresponding error message will be issued. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 28
   Signal flow of the integrated technology application (see the following subchapter)  Signal outputs for status and actual value signals [2-1] Adaptation of the drive solution via parameter setting Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 29: Integrated Technology Applications

   Detailed information on each technology application can be found in the main chapter entitled «Technology applications». ( 372) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 30: Purpose Of The Technology Applications

   Tip! If the end customer of the machine does not want to use ready-made Lenze functions, it is also possible to implement individual drive solutions with the «StateLine C», «HighLine C» and «TopLine C» versions in the form of «free interconnections».

• Page 31: Technology Application = Function Block Interconnection

  2.1.3 Technology application = function block interconnection In case of the 8400 device version, each technology application is connected to a «function block interconnection» («FB interconnection»). This FB interconnections serve to implement signal interconnections. Various FBs are available for digital signal processing, signal conversion and logic modules.

• Page 32: Selection Of The Appropriate Commissioning Tool

   Download  Software Downloads For communication between PC and inverter, the USB diagnostic adapter can be used for instance (see the following subchapter). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 33: Overview: Accessories For Commissioning

  • Connecting cables can be selected in various lengths: Connecting cable for 2.5 m length EWL0070 USB diagnostic adapter 5 m length EWL0071 10 m length EWL0072 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 34: General Notes On Parameters

  • Configuration parameters: For configuring signal connections and terminal assignments. • Diagnostic/display parameters: For displaying device-internal process factors, current actual values and status messages. These are read-only parameters. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 35: Changing The Parameterisation With The Keypad

  «Trouble» device status is active   Current limit exceeded «TroubleQSP» device status is active   Speed controller 1 in the limitation A warning is indicated   Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 36
  «Userlevel» in C00001/1: • Standard user level (Lenze setting): Only the most important menus and codes are displayed in the keypad. • Expert user level: All menus and codes are displayed in the keypad.
• Page 37
  • For reasons of disc space, only the most Deutsch important menus and parameters as well as the Français error messages are available in several languages. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 38: Change Parameter Settings With Pc And Lenze Software

  Detailed information on how to handle the »Engineer« can be found in the integrated online help that you can call with the [F1] function key. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 39: Save Parameter Settings In The Memory Module Safe Against Mains Failure

  General information • In the delivery state, the Lenze setting of the parameters has been saved to the integrated memory module. These parameters are • the parameters of the inverter •…

• Page 40
  PS03 (Information) HighLine V12 PS03 (Fault) PS03 (Information) PS03 (Information) HighLine V13 PS03 (Fault) PS03 (Fault) PS03 (Fault) TopLine V12 PS03 (Fault) PS03 (Fault) PS03 (Fault) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 41: User Menu For Quick Access To Frequently Used Parameters

  Then, all other parameters cannot be accessed without knowing the password and are thus protected against unwanted changes. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 42: Device Access Protection

  • Inform the end customer that Lenze can only provide restricted service for the devices with access protection. • It is not possible for Lenze to modify a replacement device via special accesses in such a way that it cooperates with a personalised memory module.

• Page 43: Password Protection

  0: Off / ready Temporarily deactivate the password protection C00002/33 Delete password 0: Off / ready Deactivate password protection/change password Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 44
  1. Enter the set password in C00505/3. 2. Execute «Check password» device command C00002/32 = «1: On / start» • After a successful check, password status OK is displayed in C00505/3. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 45: Individual Password Protection For Single Communication Channels

  • This means that even if the password has been deactivated temporarily by the «check password» device command, the configuration cannot be changed. • As long as a password is set, the «Load Lenze setting» device command does not change the configuration either.

• Page 46
  Save parameter settings in the memory module safe against mains failure ( 39) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 47: Device Personalisation

  After the execution of one of the device commands listed below, this parameter provides the current binding ID status: off No binding ID is set. on Binding ID is set. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 48
  ID of both components. 2. Execute «Delete binding ID» device command C00002/30 = «1: On / start» • After a successful deletion, status OFF is displayed in C00505/2. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 49: Unlocking The Inverter With A Masterpin

   Stop! When the MasterPin is used, the parameter set is reset to the Lenze setting both in the inverter and in the memory module! • This results in a permanent loss of the customised parameterisation that must be recreated! •…

• Page 50: Device Identification

  C00199/1 (here: wheel drive) is used as device designation in the Project view instead of the type (8400 HighLine): This mechanism also functions in reverse direction: If you rename the inverter in the project view via <F2>, you will be asked afterwards if you want to take over the changed name in C00199/1: 2.5.2…

• Page 51: Commissioning

  Information on how to commission using the keypad (or diagnosis terminal) can be found in the 8400 hardware manual. The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 52: Safety Instructions With Regard To Commissioning

  (nameplate data: 400 V /230 V ) is to be operated in conjunction with an   inverter for a mains voltage of 400 V. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 53: Notes On Motor Control

  • If a high torque must be provided at small speeds without feedback: Select «Sensorless vector control (SLVC) as motor control mode in C00006. Related topics: Motor control (MCTRL) ( 134) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 54: Preconditions For Commissioning With The »Engineer

  • Requesting the CDYou can also request the »Engineer« separately on CD free of charge at your Lenze representative. See the «About Lenze» area on our homepage for e.g. the corresponding German address. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 55: Trouble-Shooting During Commissioning

  This function extension is supported by the »Engineer« from version 2.15 onwards! The commissioning wizard 8400 serves to carry out a guided commissioning of the inverter based on the Lenze setting of the parameters. The set parameters can then be saved in the inverter with mains failure protection.

• Page 56
  • The Next button can only be activated again after all parameter settings in the device have been reset via the Load Lenze setting button. Related topics: Commissioning of the «Actuating drive speed» technology application ( 58) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 57: Manual Motor Direction Of Rotation Check (Manual Control)

  8. Click the button to let the motor rotate with the set speed for the set runtime. By clicking the button, the function can be aborted. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 58: Commissioning Of The «Actuating Drive Speed» Technology Application

  Parameterising the motor control ( 61) Parameterise application ( 62) Save parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 64) Enable inverter and test application ( 64) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 59: Prepare Inverter For Commissioning

  If the green «DRV-RDY» LED is blinking and the red «DRV-ERR» LED is off, the inverter is ready for operation and commissioning can proceed. Related topics: Automatic restart after mains connection/fault… ( 123) LED status displays ( 624) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 60: Creating An »Engineer« Project & Going Online

  After a connection to the inverter has been established, the following status is displayed in the Status line: Download parameter set. This command serves to overwrite the current parameter settings in the inverter by parameter settings of the »Engineer« project. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 61: Parameterising The Motor Control

  (C00022) Vmin boost 1.60 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 166) (C00016) Related topics: Notes on motor control ( 53) Motor control (MCTRL) ( 134) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 62: Parameterise Application

  • For a detailed description see the L_MPot_1 function block. ( 1416) • Go to the parameterisation dialog of the motor potentiometer via the Motor potentiometer button. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 63
  Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 394) Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 385) Setting parameters (short overview) ( 396) Configuration parameters ( 398) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 64: Save Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

  • Lenze setting: 80 % of the reference speed (C00011)  Note! Observe the actual speed value (display in C00051) as well as the LED status displays. ( 624) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 65
  • DI4: HIGH level ≡ Request a change of direction of rotation Related topics: »Inhibit at power-on» auto-start option ( 123) Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 55) Diagnostics & error management ( 623) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 66: Commissioning Of The «Table Positioning» Technology Application

  Start of profile generation Diagnostic interface for connecting the USB diagnostic adapter [3-2] Block diagram for wiring the commissioning example for the «Table positioning» application Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 67
  Parameterising the motor control ( 70) Parameterise application ( 71) Save parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 79) Enable inverter and test application ( 79) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 68: Prepare Inverter For Commissioning

  If the green «DRV-RDY» LED is blinking and the red «DRV-ERR» LED is off, the inverter is ready for operation and commissioning can proceed. Related topics: Automatic restart after mains connection/fault… ( 123) LED status displays ( 624) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 69: Creating An »Engineer« Project & Going Online

  After a connection to the inverter has been established, the following status is displayed in the Status line: Download parameter set. This command serves to overwrite the current parameter settings in the inverter by parameter settings of the »Engineer« project. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 70: Parameterising The Motor Control

  2. In the Motor control list field (C00006), select the desired motor control. Related topics: Notes on motor control ( 53) Motor control (MCTRL) ( 134) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 71: Parameterise Application

  • The corresponding wiring diagram is displayed in a pop-up window if you click the button right to the list field. • For a detailed description, see the chapter «Terminal assignment of the control modes». ( 385) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 72: Set Machine Parameters

  1. Go to the right side of the Application parameter tab and click the Machine parameter button to change to the Overview  Machine parameter dialog level: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 73: Set The Position Encoder

  3.8.4.2 Set the position encoder In the Lenze setting, the digital input terminals are configured as «normal» digital inputs. Since in this system constellation DI1 and DI2 are used to connect a two-track position encoder, the function assignment of these two inputs must be changed accordingly.

• Page 74
  7. Click the Close button to close the parameterisation dialog again. Related topics: Digital input terminals ( 323) Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as frequency inputs ( 327) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 75: Set Homing

  3. Set the position to be used for loading the set position and the actual position after homing has finished in the Homing home position input field (C01227/2). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 76
  Starting acceleration for the starting speed ramps. (C01225/1) 6. After setting the parameters for the homing, click the Back button to change back to the Overview  Signal flow dialog level. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 77: Enter One Or More Profiles

  2. Select number 3 in the Profile number list field to enter a positioning profile which can be selected via digital inputs DI5 and DI6. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 78
  4. After entering the profile, click the Back button to change back to the Overview  Signal flow dialog level. Related topics: Touch probe detection ( 357) Operating mode change with profile number ( 524) ( 582) Positioning Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 79: Save Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

  2. Select the respective control signals via the digital inputs (see sections below).  Note! Observe the actual speed value (display in C00051) as well as the LED status displays. ( 624) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 80
  «Motion Control Kernel» block. Related topics: »Inhibit at power-on» auto-start option ( 123) Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 55) Diagnostics & error management ( 623) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 81: Commissioning Of The «Switch-Off Positioning» Technology Application

  Quick stop for CCW rotation / selection of switch-off position 2 Diagnostic interface for connecting the USB diagnostic adapter [3-3] Block diagram for wiring of the commissioning example for the «Switch-off positioning» application Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 82
  Parameterising the motor control ( 85) Parameterise application ( 86) Save parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 88) Enable inverter and test application ( 88) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 83: Prepare Inverter For Commissioning

  If the green «DRV-RDY» LED is blinking and the red «DRV-ERR» LED is off, the inverter is ready for operation and commissioning can proceed. Related topics: Automatic restart after mains connection/fault… ( 123) LED status displays ( 624) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 84: Creating An »Engineer« Project & Going Online

  After a connection to the inverter has been established, the following status is displayed in the Status line: Download parameter set. This command serves to overwrite the current parameter settings in the inverter by parameter settings of the »Engineer« project. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 85: Parameterising The Motor Control

  (C00022) Vmin boost 1.60 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 166) (C00016) Related topics: Notes on motor control ( 53) Motor control (MCTRL) ( 134) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 86: Parameterise Application

  • The corresponding wiring diagram is displayed in a pop-up window if you click the button right to the list field. • For a detailed description, see the chapter «Terminal assignment of the control modes». ( 385) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 87
  Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 484) Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 475) Setting parameters (short overview) ( 486) Configuration parameters ( 488) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 88: Save Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

  LED status displays. ( 624) Related topics: »Inhibit at power-on» auto-start option ( 123) Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 55) Diagnostics & error management ( 623) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 89: Pc Manual Control

  PC manual control must be explicitly activated by the user. If PC manual control is activated, the inverter is inhibited via device command (C00002/16) first. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 90
  Click the Activate PC manual control button. • The inverter is inhibited via device command (C00002/16). • The PC manual control operator dialog is displayed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 91
  (C00002/16), i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless it already is at standstill. The different versions are described in the following chapters. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 92: Speed Control

  • Via the Inhibit controller button, the inverter can be inhibited again, i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless it already is at standstill. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 93
  • Via the << CCW and CW >> buttons, the direction of rotation can be changed. • The «speed follower» operating mode can be activated via the second Positioning tab without the functions described before: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 94: Set/Reset Home Position

  MCK status word in order that no mechanical problems occur in normal operation. • Setpoints and actual positions remain untouched until a renewed reference setting or homing. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 95: Manual Jog

  If the inverter is in the «OperationEnabled» device status: 2. Press the << Left or Right >> button (and keep it pressed) to traverse the drive with the corresponding direction of rotation. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 96: Positioning (Relative Or Absolute)

  You can find detailed information on entering profiles in the chapter entitled «Basic drive functions», subchapter «Profile entry». ( 586) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 97
  If the inverter is in the «OperationEnabled» device status: 3. Press the Run POS button to start positioning. • The Stop POS serves to stop active positioning at any time. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 98: Device Control (Dctrl)

  Note! The device states of the inverter are based on the operating states of the CiA402 standard. Device state machine and device states ( 112) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 99
  Display of all active sources of a controller inhibit C00158  Display of all active sources of a quick stop C00159  Display of the status word of the device control C00150  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 100: Device Commands (C00002/X)

  • The device will reject a write process to C00002/x if the value is >1 and issue an error message. • C00003 displays the status of the device command that was executed last. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 101
  »Engineer«. Before the desired action is carried out, a confirmation prompt appears first, asking whether the action is really to be carried out. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 102
  31 Set password static (from version 06.00.00) Password protection 32 Check password static (from version 06.00.00) Password protection 33 Delete password static (from version 06.00.00) Password protection Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 103: Load Lenze Setting

  If — in addition to the device-internal time monitoring — a monitoring of the execution time is to be implemented for this device command in a higher-level control, the monitoring time has to be 2 … 3 times higher. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 104: Load All Parameter Sets

  PROFIBUS® or INTERBUS 3.5 s 3.5 s 3.5 s EtherCAT®, PROFINET® or EtherNet/IP™ 4.0 s 3.5 s 4.0 s Ethernet POWERLINK 15.0 s 15.0 s 15.0 s Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 105: Save All Parameter Sets

  PROFIBUS® or INTERBUS 3.5 s 3.5 s 4.0 s EtherCAT®, PROFINET® or EtherNet/IP™ 4.5 s 4.5 s 4.5 s Ethernet POWERLINK 11.0 s 11.0 s 11.0 s Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 106: Enable/Inhibit Inverter

  Bit 12 Automatic brake operation Bit 13 DCB-IMP Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved  Tip! The inverter can also be enabled or inhibited via the toolbar icons. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 107: Activate/Deactivate Quick Stop

  Deactivate quick stop again C00002/17 = «0: Off / ready» device command deactivates the quick stop again, provided that no other source of a quick stop is active. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 108: Optional Settings

  If bit 4 is set in C00104/1, the position encoder is used instead of the speed encoder for quick stop with position control. • The basic conditions are shown in the Flow diagram for the quick stop function. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 109: Flow Diagram

  • Position encoder is running (no open circuit)  Although the use of 2-track HTL encoders is possible, the error detection system of the encoder always returns «OK» as error status! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 110: Reset Error

  An error message can also be acknowledged by activating the Reset error button in the Diagnostics tab. Detailed information on error messages can be found in the «Diagnostics & error management» chapter. ( 623) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 111: Delete Logbook

  • Adjustable time period: 0 … 6000 s (Lenze setting: 5 s)  Tip! The device search function can also be activated via the toolbar icon. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 112: Device State Machine And Device States

  «Warning» can occur in parallel to other device states. • The arrows between the device states mark possible state changes. • The digits stand for the status ID (see table below). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 113: Firmwareupdate

  Device statuses, priorities, and meaning of the status bits in the status word 4.2.1 FirmwareUpdate  Note! This function may only be executed by qualified Lenze personnel! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 114: Init

  If only the 24V voltage supply is available during the mains connection, the error message «LU: Undervoltage in the DC bus» is also entered into the logbook of the inverter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 115: Ident

  • error monitoring remains active, • the inverter is controlled independently of the setpoint sources. After the motor parameter identification is completed, the status changes back to «SwitchedOn». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 116: Safetorqueoff

  This device status is only possible in connection with an integrated safety system! Integrated safety systems with Inverter Drives 8400 Inverters of the 8400 series can be equipped with the integrated «Safe torque off (STO)» safety system. The integrated safety system can be used on machines for the protection of persons.

• Page 117: Readytoswitchon

  If the «Inhibit at power-on» auto-start option has been deactivated in C00142, the «ReadyToSwitchOn status switches directly to the «SwitchedOn» status after mains connection. Automatic restart after mains connection/fault… ( 123) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 118: Switchedon

  Trouble/Fault (depending on C00600/1) Error with error response «Trouble» occurs. Trouble Error with error response «TroubleQSP» occurs. TroubleQSP Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 129) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 119: Operationenabled

  Trouble/Fault (depending on C00600/1) Error with error response «Trouble» occurs. Trouble Error with error response «TroubleQSP» occurs. TroubleQSP Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 129) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 120: Troubleqsp

  Trouble Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 129) Basics on error handling in the inverter ( 623) Error messages of the operating system ( 647) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 121: Trouble

  AND the message has been cancelled. Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 129) Basics on error handling in the inverter ( 623) Error messages of the operating system ( 647) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 122: Fault

  This device status becomes active if a system fault occurs. • The device status can only be abandoned by • mains switching or • a system restart. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 123: Automatic Restart After Mains Connection/Fault

  …/Error/undervoltage/loading of the Lenze setting In C00142, the starting performance of the inverter after mains connection, undervoltage, loading of the Lenze setting as well as a «Trouble» or a «Fault» reset can be parameterised individually: Auto-start option (C00142) Lenze setting Bit 0 «Inhibit at power-on»…

• Page 124
  «Inhibit at power-on» is deactivated (bit 0 = 0), the status first changes from «ReadyToSwitchOn» to «SwitchedOn» and then to «OperationEnabled» after mains connection with an enabled controller: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 125: Auto-Start Option «Inhibit At Lenze Setting

  The «Inhibit at Lenze setting» auto-start option configurable via bit 4 of C00142 prevents the change to the «SwitchedOn» status after the Lenze setting has been loaded and the controller is enabled. For a change to the «SwitchedOn» status, the controller enable must first be deactivated after the Lenze setting has been loaded.

• Page 126: Internal Interfaces | «Ls_Driveinterface» System Block

  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Internal interfaces | «LS_DriveInterface» system block The LS_DriveInterface system block displays the device control in the FB Editor. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 127
  • You can use these bits for returning information to the master control (e.g. IPC). bStatus_Bit3 bStatus_Bit4 bStatus_Bit5 bStatus_Bit14 bStatus_Bit15 C00833/38 … 44 | BOOL bFree_1 Reserved inputs have no function bFree_2 bFree_3 bFree_4 C00833/45 … 48 | BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 128
  TRUE Motor rotates in CCW direction bNactCompare TRUE During open-loop operation: Speed setpoint < Comparison value (C00024) BOOL During closed-loop operation: Actual speed value < Comparison value (C00024) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 129: Wcancontrol/Wmcicontrol Control Words

  • The process data word is provided at the wMCIControl input via the upstream LP_MciIn1 port block. • Display parameter: C00136/1 • The bit assignment for the wCanControl/wMCIControl control words can be seen from the table below. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 130
  This output signal has the fixed value «9», which corresponds to the following assignment: • Bit 0, SwitchOn = 1 • Bit 3, EnableOperation = 1 • All others: 0 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 131: Wdevicestatusword Status Word

  • E.g. if an overvoltage has occurred. Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14 Free status bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable) Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15 Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 132: Energy Saving Mode

  The functions for the energy saving mode provide the basis for implementing the PROFIenergy PROFINET profile.  Tip! Detailed information about the PROFIenergy PROFINET profile can be obtained from the PROFINET specifications. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 133
  3. Via a «Pause-End» command, this operating status can be exited again. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 134: Motor Control (Mctrl)

  Position control/additive speed specification Braking operation/brake energy management Monitoring Internal interfaces (process signals): Internal interfaces | System block «LS_MotorInterface» Internal status signals | System block «LS_DeviceMonitor» Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 135: Motor Selection/Motor Data

  Automatic motor data identification ( 141) • The Encoder/feedback system… button serves to get to the settings for the encoder/feedback system, if available.Encoder/feedback system ( 276) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 136
  (ASM) at certain slip speeds. Detailed information and possible remedies can be found here: Application notes for asynchronous motors with high slip speed ( 148) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 137
  • the knowledge of the motor cable resistance. Both factors are determined in the course of motor parameter identification. Automatic motor data identification ( 141) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 138
  C00982 VFC-ECO: Voltage reduction ramp  C00073/1 VFC: Vp Imax controller   C00077 SC: Vp field controller  C00078 SC: Tn field controller  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 139: Selecting A Motor From The Motor Catalogue In The »Engineer

  • Go to the Application parameters tab in the Overview  Motor data dialog level and click the From motor catalogue… button to also reach the motor catalogue for the selection of another motor. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 140
  These characterise the transfer behaviour of the entire controlled system. • The plant parameters depend on the application in which the inverter and motor are used. • When a Lenze motor is selected in the »Engineer«, plant parameters are suggested for this motor for a load-free operation.

• Page 141: Automatic Motor Data Identification

  «1». Parameters Info C00073/1 VFC: Vp Imax controller   C00075 Vp current controller   C00076 Ti current controller   Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 142
  Imax in motor mode   C00497 Nact filter time constant   C00966 VFC: Time const. slip comp.  C00982 VFC-ECO: Voltage reduction ramp  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 143
  — bit 6 = «0» (Lenze setting): The field weakening controller parameters are calculated and certain special functions of the internal motor control are activated. (See table.) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 144
  • Duration approx. 80 s  Tip! In the Lenze setting, a setting of «0: automatic» is selected in C02867/1. This setting ensures that the inverter automatically selects the optimum procedure for motor parameter identification. Preconditions for executing the motor parameter identification •…
• Page 145
  Thanks to optimisation, the current controller can be set via the following parameters: Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00075 Vp current controller 7.00 V/A C00076 Ti current controller 10.61 ms Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 146
  Another cause for the abort of the motor parameter identification could be the implausibility of the entered nameplate data, e.g. the entry P = 0 kW for the motor power. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 147
  • The identification is completed if the «0: Off / ready» message is displayed in C00002/23. • After successful identification, it changes back to the «SwitchedOn» device status. 3. Inhibit inverter again. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 148: Application Notes For Asynchronous Motors With High Slip Speed

  Set the motor type («ASM» or «PSM») manually in C01001/1. The rated motor speed does not need to be limited since the number of pole pairs can be detected safely when the motor type has been set manually. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 149: Selecting The Control Mode

  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Selecting the control mode The 8400 HighLine inverter supports various modes for motor control (open loop or closed loop). • V/f characteristic control (VFCplus) with linear characteristic for asynchronous motors is preset.

• Page 150
  V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) ( 185) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 151
  The servo control basically offers the same advantages as the sensorless vector control (SLVC). Servo control (SC) ( 231) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 152
   Operation in motor mode (CW rotation),  Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation),  Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation),  Operation in generator mode (CW rotation) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 153: Selection Help

  VFCplus: V/f linear Group drives (several motors connected to inverter) Identical motors and loads VFCplus Different motors and/or alternating loads VFCplus [5-2] Standard applications with speed feedback Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 154: Defining Current And Speed Limits

  The speed limitation operates with a internal hysteresis of 50 min . The upper or lower speed limit resulting from the settings has to be higher than this hysteresis! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 155
  (SC) is selected, limitation has a direct effect on the torque-producing current component. If keypad control is selected, the nTorqueMotLim and nTorqueGenLim process signals can be parameterised via C00728/1…2. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 156
  • Reduce the limitation of the torque in motor mode via nTorqueMotLimit_a (C00728/1) and the limitation of the torque in generator mode via nTorqueGenLimit_a (C00728/2). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 157: V/F Characteristic Control (Vfcplus)

  When the auto DCB threshold (C00019) is set > 0 rpm, there is no torque at the motor shaft in the lower speed range! Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 268) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 158: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

  • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 159
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00021 Slip compensation C00056/2 Actual torque value C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00058 Output frequency C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00006 Motor control C00054…

• Page 160: Basic Settings

  «Optimising the control mode». ( 163) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter «Parameterisable additional functions». ( 258) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 161: Defining The V/F Characteristic Shape

  • You can find detailed information on the linear V/f characteristic with voltage reduction in the chapter entitled «V/f characteristic control — energy-saving (VFCplusEco)». ( 175) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 162: Defining Current Limits (Imax Controller)

  • If a sudden load is built up at the motor shaft (e.g. drive is blocked), the overcurrent disconnection may respond (fault message oC1 or oC11). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 163: Optimising The Control Mode

  • Adaptation of the controller parameters of the slip regulator if V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) is selected. Parameterising the slip regulator ( 189) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 164: Adapting The V/F Base Frequency

  Inverter with 230-V mains connection Motor voltage [V] Motor frequency [Hz] Motor connection V/f base frequency (C00015) 50 Hz  220 / 380 52.3 Hz  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 165
  • Generally, this process can also be used with motors which have different numbers of pole pairs. In case of 2-pole asynchronous motors, the mechanical limit speed must be maintained. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 166: Adapting The Vmin Boost

  C00016 C00015 C00015 C00015 f [Hz] f [Hz] [5-5] Representation of the linear V/f characteristic (on the left) and quadratic V/f characteristic (on the right) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 167: Optimising The Imax Controller

  • overcurrent errors (e.g. OC3) occur due to load impulses or too high acceleration ramps. • Recommendation: Reduction of the gain Vp (C00073/1) and reset time Ti (C00074/1) of the controller. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 168: Optimising The Stalling Behaviour

  • The maximally permissible current and the maximum torque are reduced in the field weakening range. • The risk of motor stalling is reduced.  Note! We recommend to keep the Lenze setting (0 Hz). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 169: Torque Limitation

  (differential signal between apparent motor current and nTorqueMotLimit_a or nTorqueGenLimit_a) occurs. Above the no-load current of the motor, the accuracy of the indirect torque limitation is limited. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 170
  Decel. time — quick stop C00022 Imax in motor mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00023 Imax in generator mode C00074 Ti Imax controller C00073 Vp Imax controller Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 171: Defining A User-Defined V/F Characteristic

  -20 Hz -10 Hz 0 Hz 10 Hz 20 Hz 30 Hz 40 Hz 50 Hz [5-7] Freely definable characteristic (Lenze setting for 3-phase devices) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 172
  • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 173
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00021 Slip compensation C00967/x Frequency interpol. points C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00968/x Voltage interpol. points C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00056/2 Actual torque value…

• Page 174: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

  (adaptation especially required for small machines) • If motor power < inverter power: C00022 to I = 2 I rated motor • Reduce dynamic performance of setpoint generation Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 175: V/F Characteristic Control — Energy-Saving (Vfcpluseco)

  0.75 kW 65 % 75 % 2.2 kW 55 % 85 % 7.5 kW 30 % 45 % 22 kW 23 % 45 kW 21 % Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 176: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

  • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 177
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00910/1 Max. pos. output frequency C00975 VFC-ECO: Vp C00830/4 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00910/2 Max. neg. output frequency C00976 VFC-ECO: Ti C00830/5 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00021 Slip compensation C00977…

• Page 178: Comparison Of Vfcpluseco — Vfcplus

   scaled torque in [%]  efficiency in [%]  motor voltage in [V]  power factor  electrical power in [W] [5-8] Comparison of VFCplusEco — VFCplus Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 179: Basic Settings

  «Optimising the control mode». ( 180) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter «Parameterisable additional functions». ( 258) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 180: Optimising The Control Mode

  Adapting the slope limitation for lowering the Eco function. ( 182) • Optimising the cos/phi controller. ( 182) Torque limitation Limit the torque to a lower value.Torque limitation ( 169) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 181: Improving The Behaviour At High Dynamic Load Changes

  An adaptation of the minimum voltage V/f (C00977) improves the stability in case of load impulses. • In the Lenze setting, the minimum voltage V/f is set to 20 % for the highest energy optimisation. This setting serves to respond to load torques if these amount to approx. 25 % of the rated torque or occur with low dynamics.

• Page 182: Adapting The Slope Limitation For Lowering The Eco Function

  (The dynamics when switching off the eco function is reduced) 5.5.4.3 Optimising the cos/phi controller With the Lenze setting, the cosϕ controller is set such that usually no adaptation is required for all power ratings and application cases. Behaviour Remedy/recommendation The cosϕ…

• Page 183: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

  Adapting the slope limitation for lowering the Eco function. ( 182) Speed variations in no-load operation for speeds > 1/3 Minimise speed oscillations with oscillation damping rated speed. (C00234). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 184
  Thus, a maximum output voltage is available but the tendency to speed oscillations in the field weakening range at no-load operation and with load increases. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 185: V/F Control (Vfcplus + Encoder)

  • As the slip is calculated in the feedback V/f operation and injected through the slip regulator, the slip compensation (C00021) is deactivated with V/f control. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 186: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

  • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 187
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00050 Speed setpoint C00058 Output frequency C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00006 Motor control C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00972 Vp Vf+encoder C00830/26 MCTRL: nBoost_a C00054…

• Page 188: Basic Settings

  «Optimising the control mode» chapter for the V/f characteristic control (VFCplus). ( 163) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter «Parameterisable additional functions». ( 258) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 189: Parameterising The Slip Regulator

  1014 3.33 2.00 1536 4.69 2.81 2048 6.05 3.63 3072 8.77 5.26 4096 11.49 6.90 [5-1] Slip regulator gain Vp based on the encoder increment Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 190
  6. Increase the slip regulator time constant (C00973) to approx. twice the value. 7. Increase controller limitation (C00971/1) again (e.g. to twice the slip frequency). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 191
  • very fast speed changes due to load, e.g. abrupt stopping of the drive due to an encounter with a stop or a load that is not moving. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 192: Sensorless Vector Control (Slvc)

  • A higher level of efficiency • The implementation of torque-controlled operation with speed limitation • The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speed-controlled operation Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 193: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

  • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 194
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering C00073/2 SLVC: Vp torque controller C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00273 Moment of inertia C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00022 Imax in motor mode C00084 Motor stator resistance C00105…

• Page 195: Types Of Control

  • If keypad control is performed: Parameterisable via C00728/2.  Note! To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed as absolute values. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 196: Torque Control With Speed Limitation

  Lower speed limit for speed limitation • During torque-controlled operation only (bTorquemodeOn = TRUE) C00830/23 | INT • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % rated speed (C00011) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 197: Basic Settings

  We recommend to use the flying restart function for connecting/synchronising the inverter to an already rotating drive system.Flying restart function ( 264) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter «Parameterisable additional functions». ( 258) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 198: Optimising The Control Mode

  2. Enter a greater value for the motor rotor resistance (max. factor 2!) to reduce the magnetisation time in C00082.  Note! During the starting action, a jerk may occur in the machine due to the temporarily increased motor current! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 199: Optimise Speed Controller

  • For drive systems with a good disturbance behaviour: Vp > 15 In this case, we recommend the optimisation of the dynamic performance of the torque controller. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 200: Optimising Dynamic Performance And Field Weakening Behaviour

  5.7.4.3 Optimising dynamic performance and field weakening behaviour In the Lenze setting, the torque controller has been preset in such a way that robust and stable operation with a moderate dynamic response is enabled over the entire speed range. Retrospective optimisation of the controller parameters is not necessary.

• Page 201: Optimising The Stalling Behaviour

  Ti <= 15 ms For applications with speeds above the 2-fold rated speed, we recommend a reset time Ti (C00074/2) > 15 ms. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 202: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

  • The optimisation could aim at the speed controller being completely relieved (see signal characteristics in Fig. [5-12]). 5. Save the parameter set (device command: C00002/11). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 203
  First the speed controller, then this additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in speed setpoint. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 204
  • Recommendation: Deactivate the torque feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the reference speed C0011 is 5 times higher than the rated motor speed C0087. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 205: Slip Calculation From Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data

  Automatic motor data identification ( 141) In the slip calculation from the motor equivalent circuit diagram data, the slip compensation (C00021) has no influence anymore. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 206: Optimising Field Feedforward Control And Torque Feedforward Control

  • These oscillations can be reduced by again increasing the cross current controller gain slightly in C00986.  Note! The setting of C00985 C00986 reduces the torque setting range. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 207: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

  The torque required is not generated at standstill. Increase motor magnetising current (C00095). Current overshoots occur when heavy loads are accelerated from standstill (OC1 or OC11 error). The machine runs uneven. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 208: Sensorless Control For Synchronous Motors (Slpsm)

  • The injection of a constant current may cause an unwanted heating of the motor at controlled operation. • We recommend using a temperature feedback via PTC or thermal contact. Motor temperature monitoring (PTC) ( 302) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 209
  • Higher power density of the motor • Higher efficiency • Limitation of the maximum torque in motor mode and generator mode in closed-loop operating range • Implementation of simple positioning Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 210: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

  • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 211
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00998/1 SLPSM: Filter time rotor position C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00833/68 MCTRL: bMotorRefOffsetOn C00050 Speed setpoint C00830/24…
• Page 212
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00995/1 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled accelerating current C00075 Vp current controller C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00995/2 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled standstill current C00076 Ti current controller C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00996/1 SLPSM: Closed-loop controlled switching speed C00018…

• Page 213: Types Of Control

  • It must be prevented that the actual speed value is braked into the non-observable area due to the torque limitation!  Note! To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed as absolute values. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 214: Basic Settings

  The Lenze settings of the current controller are predefined for a power-adapted motor. For an optimal drive behaviour of a synchronous motor, we recommend to adapt the controller settings. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 215
  Information on the optimisation of the control mode and the adaptation to the real application is provided in the «Optimising the control mode» chapter. Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter «Parameterisable additional functions». ( 258) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 216: Optimising The Control Mode

  The functions are described in chapter «Servo control (SC)»: Setting the current setpoint filter (band-stop filter) ( 248) Adapting the max. acceleration change (jerk limitation) ( 249) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 217: Optimise Current Controller

  ————— — s [ ] = Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085) = Motor stator resistance (C00084) = Equivalent time constant (= 500 μs) ————— — Ω Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 218: Optimise Speed Controller

  = Rated motor speed = Total moment of inertia of the drive drive, total [5-14] Recommendation for the setting of the gain of the speed controller Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 219
  • Following and speed errors can adopt very high values. • If the mechanics are sensitive, the corresponding monitoring functions are to be activated. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 220
  3. Change gain Vp in C00070/3 and reset time Tn in C00071/3. 4. Repeat steps 1 … 3 until the optimum ramp response is reached. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 221: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

  • The optimisation could aim at the speed controller being completely relieved (see signal characteristics in Fig. [5-15]). 5. Save the parameter set (device command: C00002/11). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 222
  First the speed controller, then this additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in speed setpoint. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 223
  • Recommendation: Deactivate the torque feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the reference speed C0011 5 times higher than the rated motor speed C0087. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 224: Current-Dependent Stator Leakage Inductance Ppp(I)

  If required, the saturation characteristic of this motor must be set in C02853/1…17 and then activated in C02859. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 225
  C02853/4 C02853/17 6.25 12.5 18.75 31.25 37.5 43.75 56.25 62.5 68.75 81.25 87.5 93.75 [5-16] Saturation characteristic: Inductance referring to the inductance for rated current Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 226: Pole Position Identification Without Motion

  10°. The identification takes 1 … 15 ms depending on the motor. The function is preset in the Lenze setting so that no further settings need to be made in the majority of cases. In order to get the same behaviour as before, the function can be deactivated in C02874.

• Page 227
  This can prevent e.g. a reversing of the motor due to the accuracy of identification if applications require it. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 228: Field Weakening For Synchronous Motors

  [5-17] Voltage/speed characteristic with switched-on field weakening 800V ⋅ ————————————- — nenn_mot ⋅ nenn_mot [5-18] Calculation of the maximally reachable speed with switched-on field weakening Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 229
  (e.g. since no motor temperature detection is available and/or heating in the field weakening operation is to be limited), the value must be increased or reduced accordingly in C00938. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 230
  DC-bus voltage of 800 V if field weakening is switched off. 4000 6000 [5-20] Example: Possible DC-bus voltage > 800 V if field weakening gets lost Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 231: Servo Control (Sc)

  SB LS_DeviceMonitor. • The change-over to «V/f emergency operation» can be suppressed by setting bit 8 to «1» in C02864/1. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 232: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

  • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 233
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering C00833/67 MCTRL: bPosDerivativeOn C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00273 Moment of inertia C00834/4 MCTRL: dnDeltaPos_p C00050 Speed setpoint C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00834/5 MCTRL: dnPosSetValue_p C00105…
• Page 234
  Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00270 SC: Freq. current setpoint filter C00075 Vp current controller C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00271 SC: Current setpoint filter width C00076 Ti current controller C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00272 SC: Current setpoint filter depth C00079/1…

• Page 235: Types Of Control

  • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) C00830/28 | INT • Setting range: -199.99 … 0 % • If keypad control is performed: Parameterisable via C00728/2. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 236
  • Remedy: If the torque limits nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a are increased to 115 %, the set current limit values can also be reached for a motor temperature of 20°C and maximum load. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 237: Torque Control With Speed Limitation

  • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) C00830/28 | INT • Setting range: -199.99 … 0 % • If keypad control is performed: Parameterisable via C00728/2. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 238: Basic Settings

  «Optimising the control mode». ( 240) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter «Parameterisable additional functions». ( 258) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 239: Parameterising The Encoder/Feedback System

  5. In the case of encoders with a very low resolution (number of increments < 120 increments): Change the encoder evaluation procedure in C00496 if necessary. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 240: Optimising The Control Mode

  ( 245) • For an optimal reference behaviour, the total moment of inertia can be used to make a feedforward control of the speed setpoint. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 241: Optimise Current Controller

  ————— — s [ ] = Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085) = Motor stator resistance (C00084) = Equivalent time constant (= 500 μs) ————— — Ω Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 242: Optimise Speed Controller

  = Rated motor speed = Total moment of inertia of the drive drive, total [5-21] Recommendation for the setting of the gain of the speed controller Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 243
  • Following and speed errors can adopt very high values. • If the mechanics are sensitive, the corresponding monitoring functions are to be activated. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 244
  3. Change gain Vp in C00070/2 and reset time Tn in C00071/2. 4. Repeat steps 1 … 3 until the optimum ramp response is reached. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 245: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

  • The optimisation could aim at the speed controller being completely relieved (see signal characteristics in Fig. [5-22]). 5. Save the parameter set (device command: C00002/11). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 246
  First the speed controller, then this additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in speed setpoint. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 247
  • Recommendation: Deactivate the torque feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the reference speed C0011 5 times higher than the rated motor speed C0087. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 248: Setting The Current Setpoint Filter (Band-Stop Filter)

  Readjust the speed controller after setting the current setpoint filter. Optimise speed controller ( 242) The setting of the current setpoint filter reduces the available maximum drive torque. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 249: Adapting The Max. Acceleration Change (Jerk Limitation)

  • Here, jerk limitation is provided for in the travel profile generator. Setting this jerk limitation in the motor control would lead to following errors! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 250: Slip Calculation From Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data

  • By selecting the motor in the »Engineer« motor catalogue or executing the motor parameter identification, bit 7 is set to «1» in C02864/1. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 251
  • As an alternative, the slip calculation from the motor nameplate data can be set again C02879/1 (bit 1 = «0») to obtain the previous behaviour. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 252: Optimising The Behaviour Of The Asynchronous Motor In The Field Weakening Range

  Please note that this setting may cause higher torque peaks which can be reduced again by decreasing the field weakening controller gain ( C00577) or increasing the reset time (C00578). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 253
  ( 139) • If a third party manufacturer’s motor is used, motor parameter identification must be carried out previously. Automatic motor data identification ( 141) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 254
  Increase Tn (C00578) according to the formula.  Note! Vp (C00577) can also be set to 0. In this case, Tn (C00578) should first be set to 2000 ms. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 255
  • We recommend to increase the field feedforward control for applications with very dynamic acceleration processes in the field weakening range. • Reduce the field feedforward control for very slow applications if necessary. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 256
  P component of the field weakening controller and speed controller. In the Lenze setting, this function is activated. Depending on the application, this function can be deactivated via C00079/2.

• Page 257: Feedforward Control Of The Current Controller

  It is sufficient to select the motor from the »Engineer« motor catalog or enter the data of the motor equivalent circuit manually. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 258: Parameterisable Additional Functions

  1000 Hz C02864/1 MCTRL: Special settings 2 0x0000 Bit 4: Option «Motor ident: Switching frequency 8 kHz» (Off) (from version 14.00.00) Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 259
  In this case, only the following settings in C00018 are permissible: Selection in C00018 7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised 8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised 23 16 kHz var./drive-opt./8 kHz min Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 260
  In case of larger load impulses, the overcurrent interruption may be activated, to which the inverter responds with «Error». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 261
  The inverter is designed so that operation at an ambient temperature of 45° C without derating is permissible at a switching frequency of 4 kHz. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 262: Operation With Increased Rated Power

  Stop! Operation at increased rated power is only permitted … • with the inverters listed in the 8400 hardware manual for this type of operation in the stated mains voltage range. • at switching frequencies of 2 kHz and 4 kHz.

• Page 263
  C00088 Rated motor current Automatic motor data identification ( 141) C00089 Rated motor frequency C00090 Rated motor voltage C00091 Motor cos ϕ Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 264: Flying Restart Function

  Tip! In association with the flying restart function, we recommend information provided in this documentation on the following topic: Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 268) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 265
  4. Set the flying restart current in C00994. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 266
  = Equivalent time constant (= 500 μs) ————— — Ω [5-26] Formulae for the calculation of the gain and reset time of the current controller Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 267: Dc-Injection Braking

  (C00098) C00106 Auto-DCB: Hold time 0.500 s C00107 DC braking: Hold time 999.000 s • When «999.000 s» is set, the hold time is infinite. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 268: Manual Dc-Injection Braking (Dcb)

  If the enabled drive is to start, the speed setpoint passed via the acceleration ramp must exceed the auto DCB threshold (C00019). Below this threshold, the motor will not be energised. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 269
  • The operating threshold can serve to set a dead band in the setpoint. If DC-injection braking is not to be active then, C00106 must be set to a value of «0». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 270
   Controller output current C00106  Pulse inhibit  DC-injection braking is active [5-28] Example 2: Auto-GSB signal characteristic during V/f operation with speed feedback Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 271: Slip Compensation

  (C00021 < 0) with V/f characteristic control results in «smoother» drive behaviour at heavy load impulses or applications requiring a significant speed drop under load. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 272: Oscillation Damping

  (band-stop filter) ( 248) Oscillation dampening, especially in the field weakening range, is also possible by activating the current controller feedforward control (C00079/1). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 273: Oscillation Damping Voltage Range

  • The filter time oscillation damping (C00235) should not be changed. 3. These can be indicators for smooth running: • Constant motor current characteristic • Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 274: Oscillation Damping In The Field Weakening Range

  (increment 1). 3. These can be indicators for smooth running: • Constant motor current characteristic • Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 275: Phase Sequence Reversal For Correcting Misconnected Uvw Motor Phases

  Cases of application for this function: • Phase sequence reversal in case of misconnected motor phases. • Setting of the correctly signed direction of rotation for inversely mounted motors. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 276: Encoder/Feedback System

  8400 in the chapter «technical data». The hardware manual is stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 277
  3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the following button: 4. Go to the Overview  Motor data dialog level and click the Encoder/Feedback system… button. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 278
  MCK: Mounting direction: Position encoder 0: Not inverted C00051 MCTRL: Actual speed value — rpm C01210/3 MCK: Actual position — units Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 279
  5. In the case of encoders with a very low resolution (number of increments < 120 increments): Change the encoder evaluation procedure in C00496 if necessary. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 280: Parameterising Digital Inputs As Encoder Inputs

  Parameterising digital inputs as encoder inputs The function of the digital inputs DI1/DI2 and DI6/DI7 is defined via C00115/1…2. To be able to use the digital inputs as encoder inputs, select 2, 3, or 4 (Lenze recommendation: 2) in C00115/1 or C00115/2, depending on the input terminals used.

• Page 281: Generation Of The Actual Speed Value

  • In case of the motor control types with speed feedback, the dnMotorPosAct_p position signal is directly created from the speed feedback signal. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 282: Htl Encoder At Di1/Di2

  • Limited suitability for systems with unshielded encoder and/or motor cable. • Limited suitability for encoders with poor signal quality, i.e. high error rate in scanning ratio and phase offset. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 283
  46.9 23.4 46.9 23.4 11.7 58.6 23.4 11.7 0.12 58.6 29.3 11.7 0.12 0.06 29.3 14.6 0.15 0.06 0.03 1024 14.6 0.15 0.07 0.03 0.01 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 284: Htl Encoder At Di6/Di7

  DI6/DI7 is limited. Digital input terminals ( 323) Encoder Max. measurable speed in [rpm] resolution (Number of increments) No restrictions 37500 18750 9375 4688 2344 1172 1024 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 285: Position Control/Additive Speed Specification

  TRUE = Setpoint for the speed controller is created from the position setpoint C00830/21 MCTRL: nPosCtrlOutLimit_a Limitation of the position controller output C00833/27 MCTRL: bPosCtrlOn TRUE = Position/angle control active Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 286: Braking Operation/Brake Energy Management

  If no brake resistor or regenerative module is used, the overvoltage switch-off («oU») may respond, e.g. in case of short deceleration times during feedback operation. Error messages of the operating system ( 647) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 287
  In order to install the regenerative module, follow the notes in the 8400 hardware manual. The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 288
  No response Inverter motor brake C00987 Inverter motor brake: nAdd 80 rpm C00988 Inverter motor brake: PT1 filter time 0.0 ms Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 289: Setting The Voltage Source For Braking Operation

  C00175 from version 04.00.00 onwards. This function enables rapid braking without a brake resistor. Torque oscillations can occur due to the traversing dynamics.Inverter motor brake ( 291) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 290
  A combination of all three braking procedures is also possible, e.g. for emergency braking if the brake resistor fails (C00175 = «4: Brake resistor + FI_MotBrk + RfgStop»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 291: Inverter Motor Brake

  • For applications with low mass inertias and a short braking time (< 1 s). • For all applications where braking should be as quick as possible. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 292
  [5-32] Formula for calculating the additive speed setpoint for an asynchronous motor • In case of a synchronous motor, the additive speed setpoint (C00987) should be 5 … 20 % of the rated machine speed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 293
  • Adapt the deceleration ramp so that the deceleration time is slightly below (10 … 30 %) the deceleration time that can be realised with the inverter motor brake. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 294: Avoiding Thermal Overload Of The Brake Resistor

  DC-bus system since this setting also influences the brake chopper threshold for switching on the brake chopper. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 295
  • A free input of the application block can be used to transfer the signal from I/O level to application level. • If the digital inputs/outputs are used for transmitting the signal, they must be connected electrically accordingly. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 296
  • We recommend this setting when this function is used in order to achieve a higher discharge of the DC bus — especially in case of high device power. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 297: Monitoring

  ( 112) Diagnostics & error management ( 623) Basics on error handling in the inverter ( 623) Error messages of the operating system ( 647) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 298: Device Overload Monitoring (Ixt)

  • The bMctrlIxtOverload status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor system block will be set to TRUE. • A setting of C00604 = «0: No Reaction» deactivates the monitoring. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 299: Motor Load Monitoring (I2Xt)

  The desired initialisation is selected in C00122. In the Lenze setting of C00122, the behaviour remains unchanged (no initialisation). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 300
  (100 %) at output frequencies f > 40 Hz. • The inverter outputs the «oC6: I2xt overload motor» error message and triggers the response set C00606 (default setting: «Warning»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 301: Motor Overcurrent Monitoring

  C00022 C00023 will automatically be adapted to the selected motor. Related topics: Maximum current monitoring ( 308) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 302: Motor Temperature Monitoring (Ptc)

  Connect a fixed resistor to the PTC input: • R > 4 kΩ : Fault message must be activated. • R < 1 kΩ : Fault message must not be activated. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 303: Brake Resistor Monitoring (I2Xt)

  C00572, there is the switching threshold of the brake transistor which results from the mains voltage (C00173) and the reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 304
  • A utilisation of 100 % corresponds to the continuous power of the brake resistor depending on the maximally permissible temperature limit. Related topics: Braking operation/brake energy management ( 286) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 305: Motor Phase Failure Monitoring

  • an error is pending due to a DC-bus overvoltage («OU»), • motor parameter identification is carried out, • DC-injection braking is active. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 306: Motor Phase Error Monitoring Before Operation

  In this case, the motor phase error monitoring must be switched off before operation (C2866/2 = «0: No»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 307
  • The MCTRL_Status3 status word can be integrated in the application via configuration parameters (e.g. C00620) (MCTRL_Status3 = selection 34906 in Selection list — analog signals). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 308: Mains Phase Failure Monitoring

  If the activated monitoring is tripped: • The «oC10: Maximum current reached» error message is entered in the logbook. Related topics: Motor overcurrent monitoring ( 301) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 309: Current Monitoring For Overload

  FALSE rated state. When bCurrentMonitoringOverload = FALSE, the delay time in the resolution is set to the value 0 s again. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 310: Maximum Torque Monitoring

  • The error response «Fault» occurs, i.e. the inverter is inhibited and the motor changes to torque- free operation (coasts down). • The error message «oS2: Max. motor speed reached» is entered into the logbook. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 311: Encoder Open-Circuit Monitoring

  • The bMctrlEncoderComFault status output of the LS_DeviceMonitor SB is set to TRUE. • A setting of C00586 = «0: No Reaction» deactivates the monitoring. Related topics: Encoder/feedback system ( 276) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 312: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Motorinterface

  Adaptation of the speed controller gain • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Vp (C00070) C00830/25 | INT bSpeedInterpolatorOn Speed setpoint interpolation C00833/28 | BOOL FALSE Deactivate interpolation TRUE Activate interpolation Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 313
  Stop! Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting current! bAutoBoostOn Reserved C00833/32 | BOOL (from version 04.00.00) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 314
  • In order to statically specify a minimum torque, e.g. when a load is being lifted. C00833/31 | BOOL TRUE Se the I-component of the speed controller to the value nSpeedCtrlI_a. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 315
  «Position controller output inside the limitation» status signal BOOL TRUE The position controller output is internally limited nOutputPosCtrl_a Position controller output • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 316
  From version 06.00.00: wMaxMotorTorque = 10 * M (C00057) nInputTorqueCtrl_a Input value of the torque control (torque setpoint) • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 317
  (from version 12.00.00) TRUE Internal brake chopper is switched-on. nVoltageAngleAct_a Current electrical voltage output angle of the inverter • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 360° (from version 13.00.00) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 318
  DIS code | data type bLimSpeedTorquemodeOn Status signal of torque control with speed limitation BOOL TRUE Speed limitation for torque control is active. (from version 13.00.00) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 319: Internal Status Signals | System Block «Ls_Devicemonitor

  TRUE Device utilisation (Ixt) ≥ device utilisation threshold (C00123) • Lenze setting: C00123 = 100 % nMctrlIxtRate_a Current device utilisation (Ixt) • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 320
  • Scaling: 16384 ≡ double rated power of the inverter (from version 14.00.00) nMctrlCosinePhiAct_a Current cosine phi • Scaling: 16384 ≡ cosine phi of 1.0 (from version 14.00.00) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 321
  TRUE Open-loop controlled operation of the SLPSM is active FALSE Open-loop controlled operation of the SLPSM is not active Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 322: I/O Terminals

  Wiring diagram, assignment and electrical data of the input and output terminals can be found in the hardware manual 8400 in the chapter «technical data». The hardware manual is stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. …

• Page 323: Digital Input Terminals

  The polarity can be changed from LOW active to HIGH active by clicking this button. Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the digital input. Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« ( 369) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 324
  C00443/1 DIx: Terminal level C00443/2 DIx: Output level Greyed out = display parameter Related topics: Touch probe detection ( 357) User-defined terminal assignment ( 365) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 325: Change Function Assignment

  Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as digital inputs ( 326) Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as frequency inputs ( 327) Using DI1(6) as counting input ( 332) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 326: Using Di1(6) And Di2(7) As Digital Inputs

  Related topics: Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as frequency inputs ( 327) Using DI1(6) as counting input ( 332) Internal interfaces | System block «LS_DigitalInput» ( 336) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 327: Using Di1(6) And Di2(7) As Frequency Inputs

  Detailed information on this topic is provided in chapter «Output of the encoder position of the DI1/DI2 frequency input». ( 339) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 328
  DI2 or DI7 remains configured as «normal» digital input.. Function assignment 2: DI1(6)&DI2(7)=FreqIn (2-track) This setting in C00115 can be used to connect a two-track encoder to the DI1/DI2 or DI6/DI7 terminals. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 329
  DI6/DI7. For this purpose, the rotation speed is evaluated via terminal DI1(6) and the direction of rotation of the encoder (LOW level ≡ CW direction of rotation) is evaluated via the DI(7) terminal. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 330
  C02842/2 FreqIn67: Offset 0.00 % C02843/2 FreqIn67: Gain 100.00 % C00443/1 DIx: Terminal level C00445/2 FreqIn67_nOut_v — Incr/ms C00446/2 FreqIn67_nOut_a Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 331
  ( 339) Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as digital inputs ( 326) Using DI1(6) as counting input ( 332) Internal interfaces | System block «LS_DigitalInput» ( 336) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 332: Using Di1(6) As Counting Input

  This setting in C00115 configures the input terminal DI1 or DI6 as counting input. The input terminal DI2 or DI7 remains configured as «normal» digital input.. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 333
  CountIn6: Starting value 0 incr C02840/4 CountIn6: Comparison value 65535 incr C02841/2 CountIn6: Counter content — incr C00443/1 DIx: Terminal level Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 334
  TRUE Current count value ≥ comparison value (C02840/4) wCountIn6_HW Current count value wCountIn6_LW • Output as High and Low word (without sign) • Possible counting range: 0 … 2 C02841/2 | WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 335
  Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as digital inputs ( 326) Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as frequency inputs ( 327) Internal interfaces | System block «LS_DigitalInput» ( 336) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 336: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Digitalinput

  These input terminals can then be alternatively used as frequency inputs or counting inputs. • The DI3 … DI5 input terminals are basically designed as «normal» digital inputs. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 337
  Status signal «Overflow occurred/distance processed» • Status signal can be reset via bPosIn12_Load. BOOL (from version 06.00.00) TRUE Overflow has occurred or distance is processed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 338
  FALSE High current output is controlled if an external 24-V supply is available (holding brake is released). TRUE High current output is not controlled (holding brake is closed) or external 24-V supply is not available. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 339: Output Of The Encoder Position Of The Di1/Di2 Frequency Input

  • Overflow is possible (display via bPosIn12_State) bPosIn12_State Status signal «Overflow occurred/distance processed» • Status signal can be reset via bPosIn12_Load. BOOL TRUE Overflow has occurred or distance is processed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 340
  • A positive nFreqIn12_v signal is incremented (the counter content is increased with every cycle). • A negative nFreqIn12_v signal is decremented (the counter content is reduced with every cycle). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 341
  • If the negative counter content is lower than the comparison value set in C02845, the comparison value will be added to the counter content, and bPosIn12_State will be set to TRUE for one task cycle. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 342
  ———————— 60 s • Calculation of the output value: 1000 rev. 65535 incr. dnPosIn12_p ———————— 10 s ⋅ ⋅ —————————- 10922666 incr. 60 s Rev. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 343: Switching Status Of The Motor Holding Brake At The High Current Output

   Evaluation of the switching contact of the holding via a free digital input  Wire-break detection with a closed holding brake [6-4] Connection principle motor holding brake Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 344: Digital Output Terminals

  Indicates that the polarity of the output is LOW active. The polarity can be changed from LOW active to HIGH active by clicking this button. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 345
  LS_DigitalOutput: bOut HighCurrent 0: Not connected Greyed out = display parameter Related topics: Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 364) User-defined terminal assignment ( 365) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 346: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Digitaloutput

  Relay output, potential-free two-way switch C00444/1 | BOOL bOut1 … bOut3 Digital output DO1 … DO3 C00444/1 | BOOL bOutHC Output for brake control C00444/1 | BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 347: Analog Terminals

  0 V. Exception handling: • In case of a critical exception in the application (e.g. reset), the analog outputs are set to 0 V. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 348
  Parameterising analog output ( 354) Open the parameterising dialog for assigning application inputs to the analog input. Changing the terminal assignment with the »Engineer« ( 369) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 349
  LS_AnalogOutput: nOut2_a (I) 0: Not connected Greyed out = display parameter Related topics: Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 364) User-defined terminal assignment ( 365) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 350: Parameterising Analog Input

  C00033/2 AIN2: Output value (to application) C00440/2 PT1 rounding AnalogIn2 10 ms C00598/2 Resp. to open circuit AIN2 3: TroubleQuickStop Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 351
  Using current input A1I/A2I In the Lenze setting, voltage signals in the range of ± 10 V are evaluated via the A1U and A2U input terminals. If current signals are detected via the A1I or A2I input terminals instead, the selection «1: 0…20mA»…

• Page 352: Signal Adaptation By Means Of Characteristic

   AIN2: (-xmax) 199.99 % In the »Engineer«, there is a parameterising dialog for entering the characteristic. This dialog also displays the set characteristic graphically. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 353
  Analog input dialog. 3. Click on the Settings button in order to open the Analog input — Characteristic dialog box: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 354: Parameterising Analog Output

  C00439/2 O2U: Input value (from application) C00439/4 O2I: Input value (from application) C00436/2 O2U: Voltage C00437/2 O2I: Current — mA Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 355: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Analoginput

  • Only when analog input 2 is used as current input. BOOL • Application: Cable-breakage monitoring of the 4 …20 mA circuit. TRUE |I | < 4 mA AIN2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 356: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Analogoutput

  • Scaling: 2 ≡ 16384 ≡ 10 V C00439/2 | INT nOut2I_a Analog output 2 (current) • Scaling: 2 ≡ 16384 ≡ 20 mA C00439/4 | INT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 357: Touch Probe Detection

  • Absolute positioning to target position, activated by a safely detected signal mark • Position measurement of a distance between 2 signal marks Overview of touch probe signal sources The 8400 HighLine provides the following signal sources for touch probe detection which can be configured independently: Signal source…

• Page 358
  Open the parameterisation dialog for the selected TP signal source. Parameter setting ( 359) Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02810/3…7 TPDigIn3 … TPDigIn7: Edge selection 0: Off Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 359: Parameter Setting

  TP signal source in the parameterisation dialogs for Profile entry and the basic «Homing» function via the Set up touch probe… button: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 360
  SB LS_TouchProbe. For this purpose, the offset value is converted internally from [units] to [increments]. Position TP position C02817/x LS_TouchProbe.dnTPDigInX_Position_p Offset LS_MotorInterface.dnMotorPosAct_p C02812/x TP signal Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 361
  Make sure that the position source of the respective TP signal in C02815/x is set to «0: position encoder actual value». Otherwise, no TP correction will take place. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 362: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Touchprobe

  • The signal is only pending for one task cycle (1 ms). BOOL dnTPDigIn3…7Position_p DI3 … DI7: Position measured by touch probe in [increments] DINT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 363: Application Example: «Position Measurement

  In the wiring below, digital input DI3 is used to connect the touch probe sensor. For the sake of clarity, irrelevant inputs and outputs of the LS_TouchProbe SB are masked out.  Delta position between two touch probes [6-6] Wiring for position measurement Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 364: Configuring Exception Handling Of The Output Terminals

  0.00 % C00442/4 AOut2_I: Decoupling value 0.00 % C00448 DigOut decoupling value Bit coded Related topics: Configuring exception handling of the CAN PDOs ( 734) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 365: User-Defined Terminal Assignment

  In C00007, control mode «0: Interconnection changed» will be shown.  Tip! First of all, select a Lenze configuration useful for the purpose at hand by going to C00005 and selecting a technology application that matches your drive task and then going to C00007 and selecting an appropriate control mode.

• Page 366: Source-Destination Principle

  • Every input of the application block can only be logically linked to one input signal. • An output of the application block can be logically linked to several device output terminals. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 367: Changing The Terminal Assignment With The Keypad

  C00621/101 LS_DigitalOutput: bOut HighCurrent 0: Not connected Other subcodes (not shown here) allow the configuration of input signals of different system blocks and port blocks. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 368
  The example shows that, for each input of the application block, the associated configuration parameter (C00700/x or C00701/x) is only allowed to contain one source that you enter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 369: Changing The Terminal Assignment With The «Engineer

  3. Remove checkmark for the connection LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2 in order to cancel the existing logical link. 4. Set checkmark for connection LA_NCtrl: bJogRamp1 in order to logically link this application input to digital input DI2. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 370
  5. In the bJogRamp1 list field, set the selection «16001: DigIn_bIn2». 6. Click on the Back button in order to close the dialog box again. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 371
  You can find detailed information on how to use the FB editor of the »Engineer« in the main chapter entitled «Working with the FB Editor». ( 1191) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 372: Technology Applications

  Commissioning of the «Actuating drive speed» technology application ( 58) Commissioning of the «Table positioning» technology application ( 66) Commissioning of the «Switch-off positioning» technology application ( 81) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 373: Selection Of The Technology Application And The Control Mode

  Detailed information on the individual configuration of the input/output terminals can be found in the description of the I/O terminals in the subchapter»User-defined terminal assignment». ( 365) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 374: Ta «Actuating Drive Speed

  D-flipflop • Interface to the safety module (optional) • Integration of encoder feedback Related topics: Commissioning of the «Actuating drive speed» technology application ( 58) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 375: Basic Signal Flow

   Terminal assignment & display of digital control signals  Integrated disposable «GeneralPurpose» functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-flipflop Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 376
  In the case of a grinding machine, the additional speed setpoint can, for instance, be used to control a constant circumferential speed while the grinding disk diameter is reduced. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 377: Internal Interfaces | Application Block «La_Nctrl

  • The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop is active. • C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick stop. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 378
  Additional offset for the electrical angle of rotation • If a torque is connected, e.g. dynamic acceleration processes can be generated. • Scaling: ±32767 ≡ ±180 ° angle of rotation Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 379
  • Upstream to the ramp function generator, a blocking speed masking function and a setpoint MinMax limitation are effective. • For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 380
  • In the Lenze setting, the speed setpoint is maintained. bMPotDown Decreasing the speed setpoint BOOL TRUE Approach the lower speed limit value set In C00801 with the deceleration time set in C00803. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 381
  (supervisor operation). If a controller inhibit has been set by the brake control, it will be deactivated. • In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including feedforward control. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 382
  The signals can be transferred from the I/O level to the application level via these inputs. bFreeIn1 … bFreeIn8 Free inputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeIn1 … wFreeIn4 Free inputs for 16-bit signals WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 383
  • In the «VFC (+encoder)» operating mode of the motor control, this value is determined from the current motor current and corresponds to the actual torque only by approximation. • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 384
  The signals from the application level can be transferred to the I/O level via these outputs. bFreeOut1 … bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeOut1 … wFreeOut4 Free outputs for 16-bit signals WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 385: Terminals 0

  7.2.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_NCtrl are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the inverter in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11…

• Page 386: Terminals 2

  LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 387: Terminals 2

  LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 388: Terminals 11

  LA_NCtrl.bMPotDown X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 389: Terminal 16

  LA_NCtrl. bRLQCcw X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 390: Keypad

  X5/DI4 X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 391
  X5/DI4 X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 392
  A1U has an additive effect. • The «manual jog» function via digital terminals is being prepared! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 393
  A1U has an additive effect. • The «manual jog» function via digital terminals is being prepared! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 394: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

  Bit 11 SetDCBrake 1 ≡ Activate DC-injection braking Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) ( 268) Bit 12 JogSpeed1 Activation of fixed speed 1 … 3 Bit 13 JogSpeed2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 395
  • E.g. if an overvoltage has occurred. Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14 Free status bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable) Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15 Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 396: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

  L_NSet_1: Blocking speed 3 min 0.00 % C00635 L_NSet_1: nMaxLimit 199.99 % C00636 L_NSet_1: nMinLimit -199.99 % C00670 L_OffsetGainP_1: Gain 1.0000 C00671 L_OffsetGainP_2: Gain 1.0000 C00672 L_OffsetGainP_3: Gain 1.0000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 397
  L_MPot_1: Inactive fct. 0: Retain value C00805 L_MPot_1: Init fct. 0: Load last value C00806 Use of motor potentiometer 0: No Related topics: »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 398: Configuration Parameters

  1002 bSpeedCcw bCwCcw bOut3 1004 /100 bSpeedActCompare bNactCompare bOutHC 1005 /101 [7-2] Pre-assignment of the «Actuating drive speed» application in the «Terminals 0» control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 399
  1010 C00411/2 C00412 — Bit 1 bGPSignalOut2 1011 C00411/3 C00412 — Bit 2 bGPSignalOut3 1012 C00411/4 C00412 — Bit 3 bGPSignalOut4 1013 [7-3] «GeneralPurpose» functions Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 400
  C700/27 1024 wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3 C700/28 1025 wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4 C700/29 1026 [7-5] Free inputs/outputs Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 365) »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 401: Ta «Actuating Drive Speed (Ac Drive Profile)

  (when NetRef=0). For this reason, the nNAdd_a input at the L_NSet_1 setpoint generator for determining an additional speed setpoint is not connected in the Lenze setting. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 402: I/O Assemblies

  Detailed information on EtherNet/IP™ can be found at the web page of the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association) user organisation: http://www.odva.org Related topics: Process data assignment for fieldbus communication Run/Stop event Scaling of speed and torque values Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 403: Basic Signal Flow

  Terminal assignment & display of digital control signals  Integrated disposable «GeneralPurpose» functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary  delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-flipflop Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 404
  • In case of control via fieldbus via bit 0 «Run Forward» and bit 1 «Run Backward» of the AC Drive Profile control word. • In case of local control via the bSetSpeedCcw application input or by selecting negative fixed setpoints. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 405
  • All others: FALSE 20: Keypad C00728/3 21: PC C00472/1 * The local setpoint is selected in the Lenze setting via the analog input 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 406: Internal Interfaces | Application Block «La_Nctrl

  TRUE The current fault is reset, if the cause for the fault is eliminated. • If the fault still exists, the error status remains unchanged. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 407
  • If the value is negative, the voltage is reduced. • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V  Stop! Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting current! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 408
  TRUE Direction of rotation to the left (Ccw) bRLQCw Activate clockwise rotation (fail-safe) • For a detailed functional description see the L_RLQ BOOL FALSE Quick stop TRUE CW rotation Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 409
  • Alternative acceleration times are selected in C00101/1…15. • The selection of the alternative deceleration times is carried out in C00103/1…15. • For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 410
  • The influence factor of the PID controller can be limited to a certain value (- 199.99% … + 199.99%) via nPIDInfluence_a. • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % • Internal limitation to ± 199.99 % Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 411
  • If the comparison statement is true, the output bGPCompareOut will be set to TRUE. bGPDFlipFlop_InD D-FlipFlop: Input signals bGPDFlipFlop_InClk • Data, clock and reset input bGPDFlipFlop_InClr BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 412
  TRUE Speed setpoint from the ramp function generator = 0 bSpeedActEqSet TRUE Actual speed value = speed setpoint BOOL nMotorCurrent_a Current stator current/effective motor current • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % I (C00022) max_mot Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 413
  • Gain and offset for each output signal can be parameterised in C00413/1…8. BOOL bGPDFlipFlop_Out D-FlipFlop: Output signal BOOL bGPDFlipFlop_NegOut D-FlipFlop: Negated output signal BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 414
  The signals from the application level can be transferred to the I/O level via these outputs. bFreeOut1 … bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeOut1 … wFreeOut4 Free outputs for 16-bit signals WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 415: Terminal Assignment Of The Control Modes

  7.3.4 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_NCtrl are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the inverter in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11…

• Page 416: Terminals 0

  LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 417: Terminals 2

  LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 418: Terminals 11

  LA_NCtrl.bMPotDown X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 419: Terminal 16

  LA_NCtrl. bRLQCcw X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 420: Keypad

  X5/DI4 X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 421
  X5/DI4 X3/O1U LA_NCtrl.nMotorSpeedAct_a * X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 422: Can

  X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 394) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 423: Mci

  X5/DI7 X3/O2I * 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X107/BD1 X4/DO1 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 424) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 424: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

  Scaling of speed and torque values Word 4 — Not preconfigured Words 5 … 16 — Not preconfigured • Only available in control mode «40: MCI». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 425: Run/Stop Event

  0  1 Run2 0  1 0  1 No Action No Action No Action No Action 1  0 Run2 1  0 Run1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 426: Scaling Of Speed And Torque Values

  Description C00057 Maximum torque Reference variable for torque-related signals C01353/2 ACDrive: Torque scaling In the Lenze setting «0», no scaling takes place (2 = 1) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 427: Ac Drive Profile Diagnostic Parameters

  L_NSet_1: Acceleration time — add. setpoint 0.000 s C00221 L_NSet_1: Deceleration time — add. setpoint 0.000 s C00222 L_PCTRL_1: Vp C00223 L_PCTRL_1: Tn 400 ms C00224 L_PCTRL_1: Kd Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 428
  L_MPot_1: Inactive fct. 0: Retain value C00805 L_MPot_1: Init fct. 0: Load last value C00806 Use of motor potentiometer 0: No Related topics: »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 429: Configuration Parameters

   Torque mode: nAuxSetValue_a input is internally connected to nTorqueGenLim_a; speed setpoint = 100 % (fixed) [7-7] Pre-assignment of the «Actuating drive speed» (AC Drive Profile) application in the «Terminals 0» control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 430
   Torque mode: nAuxSetValue_a input is internally connected to nTorqueGenLim_a; speed setpoint = 100 % (fixed) [7-8] Pre-assignment of the «Actuating drive speed» (AC Drive Profile) application in the «CAN » control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 431
   Torque mode: nAuxSetValue_a input is internally connected to nTorqueGenLim_a; speed setpoint = 100 % (fixed) [7-9] Pre-assignment of the «Actuating drive speed» (AC Drive Profile) application in the «MCI» control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 432
  1010 C00411/2 C00412 — Bit 1 bGPSignalOut2 1011 C00411/3 C00412 — Bit 2 bGPSignalOut3 1012 C00411/4 C00412 — Bit 3 bGPSignalOut4 1013 [7-10] «GeneralPurpose» functions Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 433
  C700/27 1024 wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3 C700/28 1025 wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4 C700/29 1026 [7-12] Free inputs/outputs Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 365) »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 434: Ta «Table Positioning

  • Integrated, freely available «GeneralPurpose» functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-FlipFlop, counter Related topics: Commissioning of the «Table positioning» technology application ( 66) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 435: Basic Signal Flow

   Speed setpoint input limitation Holding brake control               Basic function «Homing» MCKInterface  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 436
  (is executed by the MCKInterface)  Integrated disposable «GeneralPurpose» functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-flipflop Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 437: Possibilities For The Position Selection

  … bPosProfileNo_4. • The chosen profile is started via the process input bPosExecute of the FB L_MckCtrlInterface the control bit «PosExecute» in the MCK control word. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 438
   Note! How to store changed profile parameters safely against mains failure in the memory module: Set C00002/11 = «1: On / Start». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 439: Internal Interfaces | Application Block «La_Tabpos

  • The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop is active. • C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick stop. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 440
  • For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet bJogSpeed1 Inputs for overriding fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main setpoint bJogSpeed2 • Selection inputs are binary coded. BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 441
  LP_MciIn or WORD LP_CanIn fieldbus interface. • See the «MCK control word» chapter for a detailed description of the individual control bits. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 442
  • 16384 ≡ 100 % of the maximum traversing speed (display in C01211/1). • If the override value is 0 %, the drive is brought to a standstill. bEnableAccOverride Acceleration override BOOL TRUE Activate acceleration override Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 443
  Positioning: Cancel travelling BOOL TRUE Stop positioning From version 11.00.00, more travel requests will be inhibited («PosExecute» will be blocked). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 444
  • The on-delay can be set in C00720/1. BOOL • The off-delay can be set in C00720/2. • The time-delayed input signal is output at output bGPDigitalDelayOut. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 445
  Display of the status determining error (LOW word) WORD wStateDetermFailNoHigh Display of the status determining error (HIGH word) WORD bDriveFail TRUE Inverter in error status. • «Fault» device status is active. BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 446
  Active setpoint-generating state of the MCK. • Bit B0 … B3 contain the information of the MCK status word. WORD • Bits B4 … B15 are fixed at «0». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 447
  Output of the target position in [units] wPosOutUnitsHW • wPosOutUnitsLW = Low-Word, wPosOutUnitsHW = High-Word • The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296/2. WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 448
  … bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeOut1 … wFreeOut4 Free outputs for 16-bit signals WORD dnFreeOut1_p Free outputs for 32-bit signals dnFreeOut2_p WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 449: Terminal Assignment Of The Control Modes

  7.4.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_TabPos are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the inverter in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11…

• Page 450: Terminals 0

  When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE Speed follower FALSE TRUE Homing TRUE FALSE Manual jog TRUE TRUE Positioning Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 451: Terminals 2

  (DI4) (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE FALSE Speed follower FALSE FALSE TRUE Homing FALSE TRUE FALSE Manual jog FALSE TRUE TRUE Positioning TRUE TRUE TRUE Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 452: Terminals 11

  (DI4) (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE FALSE Speed follower FALSE FALSE TRUE Homing FALSE TRUE FALSE Manual jog FALSE TRUE TRUE Positioning TRUE TRUE TRUE Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 453: Terminal 16

  When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI5) (DI6) FALSE FALSE Speed follower FALSE TRUE Homing TRUE FALSE Manual jog TRUE TRUE Positioning Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 454: Keypad

  10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U LA_TabPos.nMotorCurrent_a 10V ≡ 100% of I (C00022) max_mot X5/DI7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bHomePosAvailable Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 455
  10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U LA_TabPos.nMotorCurrent_a 10V ≡ 100% of I (C00022) max_mot X5/DI7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bHomePosAvailable Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 456: Can

  10V ≡ 100% of I (C00022) max_mot X5/DI7 LP_CanOut1: bState_B7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bImaxActive Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 458)  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 457: Mci

  10V ≡ 100% of I (C00022) max_mot X5/DI7 LP_MciOut: bState_B7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_TabPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X107/BD2 X4/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X4/DO3 LA_TabPos.bImaxActive Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 458) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 458: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

  Bit 13 ManJogPos Bit 14 — Free control bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable) Bit 15 — Free control bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 459
  Signal from the digital input DI3 Bit 14 QSPIsActive 1 ≡ Quick stop is active Bit 15 — Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 460: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

  MCK operating mode at profile no. 2 3: ManualJog C01298/4 MCK operating mode at profile no. 3…15 4: Positioning C01299 MCKI: Status MCKInterface Related topics: »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 461: Configuration Parameters

  C_wDriveCtrl 20005 bCInhActive bCInhIsActive 1102 bSpeedCcw bCwCcw 1104 bSpeedActCompare bNactCompare 1105 [7-14] Pre-assignment of the «Table positioning» application in the «Terminals 0» control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 462
  1122 C00411/2 C00412 — Bit 1 bGPSignalOut2 1123 C00411/3 C00412 — Bit 2 bGPSignalOut3 1124 C00411/4 C00412 — Bit 3 bGPSignalOut4 1125 [7-15] «GeneralPurpose» functions Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 463
  C710/24 1123 wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3 C710/25 1124 wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4 C710/26 1125 [7-17] Free inputs/outputs Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 365) »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 464: Ta «Switch-Off Positioning

  (fixed setpoint 2) in a controlled way. When the limit switch is reached, the drive is brought to a standstill led by the deceleration ramp or the QSP ramp. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 465
  • If necessary, additional functions like manual jog or homing must be realised externally, e.g. via a control. • As the 8400 HighLine inverter does not meet safety-related functions except STO (Safe Torque Off), you must observe that all safety-related aspects are realised by the plant instructor.

• Page 466: Basic Signal Flow

   Selection of edge/level for tripping the ramp down and stop functions (L_JogCtrlExtension_1) Holding brake control   Integrated disposable «GeneralPurpose» functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-flipflop Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 467: Internal Interfaces | Application Block «La_Switchpos

  • The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop is active. • C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick stop. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 468
  Additional offset for the electrical angle of rotation • If a torque is connected, e.g. dynamic acceleration processes can be generated. • Scaling: ±32767 ≡ ±180 ° angle of rotation Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 469
  • The additional speed setpoint can be shown via ramp times of a second ramp function generator. • For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 470
  (supervisor operation). If a controller inhibit has been set by the brake control, it will be deactivated. • In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including feedforward control. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 471
  Display of the status determining error (LOW word) WORD wStateDetermFailNoHigh Display of the status determining error (HIGH word) WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 472
  • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) nDCVoltage_a Actual DC-bus voltage • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V nMotorVoltage_a Current motor voltage/inverter output voltage • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 473
  … bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeOut1 … wFreeOut4 Free outputs for 16-bit signals WORD dnFreeOut1_p Free outputs for 32-bit signals dnFreeOut2_p WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 474: Truth Table For Activating The Pre-Switch Off

  • If the stop function is activated via the bJogCtrlStop3 are evaluated. selected bJogCtrlStop input, the setpoint generator is deactivated. [7-1] Truth table for activating the pre-switch off Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 475: Terminal Assignment Of The Control Modes

  7.5.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_SwitchPos are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the inverter in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11…

• Page 476: Terminals 0

  10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X5/DI1 LA_SwitchPos.bJogCtrlJog1 X3/A1I X5/DI2 LA_SwitchPos.bJogCtrlJog2 X3/A2U X5/DI3 LA_SwitchPos.bFailReset X3/A2I X5/DI4 LA_SwitchPos.bSetSpeedCcw X3/O1U X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_SwitchPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 477: Terminals 2

  LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlStop2 X3/A2U X5/DI3 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCw X3/A2I LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel1 X3/O1U X5/DI4 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCcw X3/O1I LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel2 X3/O2U X5/DI5 X5/DI6 X4/DO1 X5/DI7 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 X107/BD1 LA_SwitchPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X107/BD2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 478: Terminals 11

  LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCw X3/A2I LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel1 X3/O1U X5/DI4 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCcw X3/O1I LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel2 X3/O2U X5/DI5 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlStop2 X5/DI6 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlSlowDown2 X4/DO1 X5/DI7 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 X107/BD1 LA_SwitchPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X107/BD2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 479: Terminal 16

  X3/A1I X5/DI2 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlJog2 X3/A2U X5/DI3 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCw X3/A2I X5/DI4 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCcw X3/O1U X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_SwitchPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 480: Keypad

  Connection Assignment X101/NC-NO X5/RFR X3/A1U X5/DI1 X3/A1I X5/DI2 X3/A2U X5/DI3 X3/A2I X5/DI4 X3/O1U X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_SwitchPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 481
  Connection Assignment X101/NC-NO X5/RFR X3/A1U X5/DI1 X3/A1I X5/DI2 X3/A2U X5/DI3 X3/A2I X5/DI4 X3/O1U X5/DI5 X3/O1I X5/DI6 X3/O2U X5/DI7 X3/O2I X107/BD1 LA_SwitchPos.bMBrakeReleaseOut X4/DO1 X107/BD2 X4/DO2 X4/DO3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 482: Can

  You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to «1: NOut = NSet + NAdd» so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 483: Mci

  You must set the setpoint arithmetic in C00190 to «1: NOut = NSet + NAdd» so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 484: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

  Ramping down of the setpoint generator in the downstream L_NSet FB according to the Truth table for activating the pre-switch off Bit 9 reserved_1 Reserved (currently not assigned) Bit 10 reserved_2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 485
  Device state machine and device states (see table [4-1]) Bit 9 StatusCodeBit1 Bit 10 StatusCodeBit2 Bit 11 StatusCodeBit3 Bit 12 Warning 1 ≡ a warning is indicated Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 486: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

  L_NSet_1: Blocking speed 3 min 0.00 % C00635 L_NSet_1: nMaxLimit 199.99 % C00636 L_NSet_1: nMinLimit -199.99 % C00670 L_OffsetGainP_1: Gain 1.0000 C00671 L_OffsetGainP_2: Gain 1.0000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 487
  MCK: Pos. min. speed 0.00 % C02611/3 MCK: Neg. min. speed 0.00 % C02611/4 MCK: Neg. max. speed 199.99 % Related topics: »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 488: Configuration Parameters

  1204 bImpIsActive bImpIsActive 1205 bSpeedCcw bCwCcw 1207 bSpeedActCompare bNactCompare 1208 [7-19] Pre-assignment of the «Switch-off positioning» application in the «Terminals 0» control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 489
  1219 C00411/2 C00412 — Bit 1 bGPSignalOut2 1220 C00411/3 C00412 — Bit 2 bGPSignalOut3 1221 C00411/4 C00412 — Bit 3 bGPSignalOut4 1222 [7-20] «GeneralPurpose» functions Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 490
  1223 wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4 C760/25 1224 dnFreeIn1_p dnFreeOut1_p 1205 dnFreeIn2_p dnFreeOut2_p 1206 [7-22] Free inputs/outputs Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 365) »GeneralPurpose» functions ( 491) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 491: Generalpurpose» Functions

  This function switches between two analog input signals. The switch-over is controlled by a boolean input signal. C00830/14 nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a C00830/15 nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a C00833/13 bGPAnalogSwitchSet [7-23] GeneralPurpose function «Analog switch» • For a detailed functional description see FB L_AnalogSwitch. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 492: Arithmetic

  [7-25] GeneralPurpose function «Multiplication/division» Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00699/1 L_MulDiv_1: Numerator C00699/2 L_MulDiv_1: Denominator 10000 • For a detailed functional description see FB L_MulDiv. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 493: Binary Delay Element

  C00820 L_DigitalLogic_1: Function 0: bOut = 0 C00821/1 bIn1=0/bIn2=0/bIn3=0 0: FALSE C00821/… C00821/8 bIn1=1/bIn2=1/bIn3=1 0: FALSE • For a detailed functional description see FB L_DigitalLogic. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 494: Analog Comparison

  Value Unit C00411/1…4 L_SignalMonitor_b: Signal 1 … 4 0: Not connected C00412 L_SignalMonitor_b: Inversion Bit coded • For a detailed functional description see FB L_SignalMonitor_b. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 495: Analog Signal Monitor

  C00833/4 bGPDFlipFlop_InD bGPDFlipFlopOut C00833/5 bGPDFlipFlop_InClk C00833/6 bGPDFlipFlop_InClr bGPDFlipFlop_NegOut [7-31] GeneralPurpose function «D-FlipFlop» (clock-edge controlled) • For a detailed functional description see FB L_DFlipFlop. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 496: Counter

  C01101/1 L_Counter_1: Comparison 0: Greater than or equal to • Only available with TA «Table positioning». • For a detailed functional description see FB L_Counter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 497: Basic Drive Functions (Mck)

  In this chapter, the standard and basic drive functions integrated in the Motion Control Kernel (MCK) of the 8400 HighLine are described to which the active technology application can gain access via defined internal interfaces. As a result, the time-consuming creation of individual FB interconnections is avoided and the amount of work and complexity involved in the implementation of standard functions is minimised.

• Page 498: Basic Signal Flow

  These are visible in the FB Editor for monitoring purposes and must be connected to each other: [8-1] Interconnection of Motion Control Kernel and motor control function Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 499: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Motioncontrolkernel

  • Transfer is possible in any operating mode («Homing on the fly»). • For this function, the dnPosRefValue_p_ output must be connected to the input of the same name of the SB LS_MotorInterface. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 500
  Value for adaptation of torque limitation • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % of the torque limit specified at the LS_MotorInterface system block via the nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a inputs. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 501
  Input for Hardware limit switches (negative) BOOL bHomingMark Input for pre-stop mark/pre-stop signal for homing • Relevant for homing modes «4» … «7». BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 502
  Input for status detection via switching contacts at the brake BOOL (from version 06.00.00) • Only effective if bit 5 in C02582 is set to «1». FALSE Brake is released. TRUE Brake is applied. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 503
  • For a detailed description of the individual status bits, see subchapter entitled «MCK status word. WORD • Display parameter: C01241 wAuxState For future extensions — Output has no function at present time! Additional status word WORD Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 504
  C01067/1…3 can be used to inform these FBs that the gearbox direction of rotation is inverted is mostly done by selecting «motor mounting position inverted»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 505: Mck Control Word

  «1» ≡ Activate S-ramp override SRampOverride 14 PosTeachSetPos «1» ≡ Teach MCK set position into the selected profile 15 PosTeachActPos «1» ≡ Teach current position into the selected profile Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 506
  (Lenze setting: «WarningLocked»).  Tip! Travel requests/profiles can also be started while the drive is running. The drive does not need to be at standstill. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 507: Mck Status Word

  Control Kernel. • If the holding brake control sets a controller inhibit when the holding brake is closed, the internal «StandBy» operating mode is not assumed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 508
  • PosMode in the MCK control word = 0:  Use positioning mode set in C01300/x • Invalid PosMode in the MCK control word:  Error message «Ck09: Positioning mode invalid» Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 509: Status Bit «Homposavailable

  • Mains recovery at a cycle set unlike «0 units» in C1201/1 and if the position difference at reference recovery is higher than 1000 cycles. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 510: Status Bit «S_Shapingactive

   Profile completed (bit 9 is reset in case of profile restart and profile completion) [8-2] Example: Display of the rounding generated via the «S_ShapeActive» status bit Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 511: Status Bit «Breadytooperate

   Speed follower: Synchronisation active  Position follower: Synchronisation active BA 0 … 5: Operating mode 0 … 5 [8-3] Creation of the status bit bReadyToOperate Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 512: Mck State Machine

  Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Manual jog requested Homing requested Positioning requested Speed follower requested Position follower requested Stop requested [8-4] MCK state machine Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 513: Standby» Operating Mode

  [8-5] Example: Sensitivity threshold for speed transfer from the «StandBy» operating mode In the Lenze setting «0.5 %», the sensitivity threshold corresponds to approx. 7.5 rpm at a reference speed of 1500 rpm set in C00011. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 514: Interface To Safety System

  • In the «Position follower» operating mode, (forward) positioning to the signalled absolute position always takes place if this position differs from the internal position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 515: Consideration Of Residual Value In Case Of External Profile Calculation

  Selection of the target position in [increments] for the «table positioning» application. The signal is available in the application level at the correspondent • dnPosProfilePosition output of the LA_TabPosIn application block. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 516: Mckinterface

  • Selection of override values • Connection for limit switch & pre-stop mark for homing • Holding brake control  Output of status signals of the Motion Control Kernel Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 517
  Output by the LS_MotionControlKernel, the status words wMotionState1 and wMotionState2 also constitute input information for the downstream L_MckStateInterface FB, which provides this information to the application in the form of process signals. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 518: Control Inputs | «L_Mckctrlinterface» Function Block

  In addition to the ORing of discrete input signals with the control word inputs, the FB has further functions that are described in the following subchapters. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 519
  FALSE Speed 1 (C01231/1) active TRUE Speed 2 (C01231/2) active bReleaseLimitSwitch Manual jog: Retract operated limit switch BOOL TRUE Retract operated limit switch (in opposite direction) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 520
  Positioning: Do not execute sequence profile (switch-off profile linkage) BOOL TRUE Evaluation of the sequence profile number parameterised in C01307/1…15 for the selected profile is suppressed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 521
  Stipulation of the profile to be executed • Optionally as a data word or binary coded. WORD • When the profile is stipulated, this FB carries out a mode change in the Lenze bProfileNo_1 setting at the same time: • If profile 0 is selected: Activation of «Speed follower» operating mode bProfileNo_8 •…
• Page 522
  FALSE Okay, no error BOOL TRUE • Plausibility check error or • control information error (in this case after ORing the individual signals with the control words) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 523: Alternative Functions For Control Bit «Posexecute

  = FALSE bHomingStartStop remains unchanged bPosTeachSetPos = TRUE (edge) bPosExecute = FALSE bPosExecute = FALSE bPosStop remains unchanged bHomingStartStop remains unchanged bPosTeachSetPos = FALSE Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 524: Operating Mode Change With Profile Number

  FB L_MckCtrlInterface). Note: These inputs are internally connected via OR-logic. Only connect one of these inputs to ensure non-ambiguous operating mode changeovers! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 525: Status Outputs | Fb «L_Mckstateinterface

  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8.3.2 Status outputs | FB «L_MckStateInterface» This FB provides the application with different status information of the Motion Control Kernel via process outputs. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 526
  Current traversing profile number • Bit B0 … B7 contain the information of the MCK status word. WORD • Bits B8 … B15 are fixed at «0». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 527
  • When C01296/2 > 0, dnPosOut_p is updated isochronously with the outputs wPosUnitsLW and wPosUnitsHW and hence not in a 1-ms cycle (not in real time)! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 528: Basic Settings

  Application Parameters on the dialog level Overview  Machine parameters:  Tip! You are provided with more detailed information on the machine parameters «Gearbox ratio» and «Feed constant» in the following subchapters. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 529
  C00057 Maximum torque — Nm C01213/1 MCK: Max. traversing distance — units Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 530: Gearbox Ratio

  Example calculation on the basis of the technical gearbox data: Gearbox factor numerator (C01202/1) 6336 × × Gearbox factor denominator (C01202/2) × × [8-10] Calculation example (for 2-stage gearbox) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 531: Feed Constant

  [8-12] Schematic diagram: Feed constant for a spindle drive • In the case of a rotary table and its specification as an angle, the feed constant is = 360°/revolution. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 532: Activation Of The Modulo Measuring System

  The Modulo system is activated by setting a cycle (C01201/1) > 0 units. • The setting of the cycle is possible when the inverter is enabled. • When the cycle (C01201/1) is set to 0 units (Lenze setting), the traversing range is unlimited (classical measuring system).

• Page 533
  Target position displayed in C01210/6 in [units] Absolute (shortest path) Defined position absolute (Cw) Defined position absolute (Ccw) Defined position Continuous 214748.3647 Relative Modulo position + defined position Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 534
  Case 4 Positioning mode «absolute (Cw)» Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Positioning mode «absolute (Ccw)» Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 535: Min/Max Speed

  C02610/2 Sync C02611/3 C02611/4  Setpoint range  Synchronisation range [8-15] Example: Speed setpoint generation in the «Speed follower» operating mode (with nSpeedAddValue_v = 0) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 536: Limit Position Monitoring

   Set position  Actual position  C01229/1: Positive software limit position  C01229/2: Negative software limit position [8-16] Definition of the software limit position trigger limits Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 537
  Hysteresis width in neg. direction  C01229/1 C01229/2 C01229/1 C01229/2 – –     C01229/1 ——————————————————— C01229/2 ——————————————————— –     Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 538
  If the software limit positions are active and a software limit position is passed («overtravel»): • The error response «TroubleQuickStop» takes place in the Lenze setting, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill in the deceleration time set for the quick stop function and does so irrespective of the setpoint selection.

• Page 539: Hardware Limit Switches

  If one of the two monitoring inputs is set to TRUE: • The error response «TroubleQuickStop» takes place in the Lenze setting, i.e. the drive is brought to a standstill in the deceleration time set for the quick stop function and does so irrespective of the setpoint selection.

• Page 540
  Limit switch is activated and setpoint command has been transmitted Stop Setting of the operating mode Position follower Limit switch is activated and setpoint in direction of the activated limit switch is pending Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 541: Target Position Monitoring (Status «Drive In Target»)

  TRUE FALSE  bInTarget C01244/1 TRUE FALSE  target position window (symmetrically around the target position; 2 x C01245/1)  dwell time [8-19] Signal characteristics Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 542
  «0» is injected into the process, • a new homing process starts, • the reference is set, • the device is switched off/on. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 543: Monitoring Of The Maximum Travel Distance

  • The internal status «reference known» is reset (the inverter is no longer referenced). • A setting of C00595/7 = «0: No Reaction» deactivates the monitoring. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 544: Following Error Monitoring System

  MCK: Resp. to following error 2 Warning  Note! If the limit for the following error is set to «0.0000 units» (Lenze setting, the following error monitoring system is not active.  Tip! In certain situations (e.g. dynamic acceleration of the load), higher system-dependent following errors occur than while approaching the target position.

• Page 545: Monitoring Of The Following Error In Case Of Controller Inhibit

  <> 0) in case of controller inhibit, the setpoint position is exactly in the target after 10 positioning processes and 9 x controller inhibits (in case of 10 x relative traverse paths). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 546: Setpoint Holdback For Bus Runtime Compensation

  A further delay between the reading of the received data and the forwarding to the control loops is caused by the internal cycle time of the inverters (1 ms for the 8400 device series). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 547
  As the setpoint holdback is implemented in the Motion Control Kernel, the LS_MotionControlKernel system block is required for this function independent of the setpoint source. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 548
  Effective setpoint of the motor control in the master  Effective setpoint of the motor control in the slave  [8-22] Example 1: Runtime behaviour without setpoint holdback Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 549
  Effective setpoint of the motor control in the master  Effective setpoint of the motor control in the slave  [8-23] Example 2: Runtime behaviour with setpoint holdback = 2 ms Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 550: Setting Or Activation Of Maximum Jerk For Traversing Profiles

  If the sequence profile is started with a non-accelerated drive, the parameters of the sequence profile are continued to be used for the jerk calculation without maximum comparison to the current profile. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 551: Speed Follower

  Bit 7 Position controller off In the «Speed follower» operating mode, the position controller is deactivated. Thus, the compensation of the following error is switched off. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 552: Requesting The Operating Mode

  The synchronisation mode serves to travel the synchronisation range dynamically with the synchronisation ramp set in C02610/2. Min/Max speed ( 535) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 553: Homing

   Note! Currently, the 8400 HighLine inverter only supports the evaluation of incremental signals (encoder). The home position is always deleted after mains switching. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 554: Parameter Setting

  0.0000 units C01246/1 MCK: Ref. TP signal source (from version 06.00.00) 0: No TP C01246/2 MCK: Set.Ref. signal source (from version 06.00.00) 0: No TP Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 555: Functional Settings

  When homing is started (mode 4 … 15), the reference information is deleted. Bit 5 Maximum jerk Setting or activation of maximum jerk for traversing profiles ( 550) Bit 6 Reserved Bit 15 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 556: Homing Mode

  • The edge sensitivity of this input and the response to the pre- switch off signal depend on the selected homing mode (see the following description of the homing modes). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 557
  C01225/2 is that deceleration to search speed takes place quickly and position detection is exact (at slower search speed). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 558
  1. Movement in negative direction with search profile data set. 2. Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection. 3. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 559
  1. Movement in positive direction with search profile data set. 2. Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection. 3. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 560
  2. Positive edge at bHomingMark activates search profile data set for further reference search. 3. Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection. 4. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 561
  2. Positive edge at bHomingMark activates search profile data set for further reference search. 3. Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection. 4. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 562
  Active Active Active Procedure: 1. Movement in negative direction with start profile data set. 2. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 563
  3. Negative edge of the travel range limit switch enables home position detection. 4. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 564
  3. Negative edge of the travel range limit switch enables home position detection. 4. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 565
  • It is possible that, as a result, the machine will remain on an operated limit switch. • It is therefore recommended that a home value offset be set in C01227/1 in order to release the operated limit switch. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 566
  • It is possible that, as a result, the machine will remain on an operated limit switch. • It is therefore recommended that a home value offset be set in C01227/1 in order to release the operated limit switch. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 567
  C01227/1 to avoid stopping at the positive stop.  Effective torque limit [8-26] Wiring for torque limit when homing to «Positive stop» (homing modes 14/15) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 568
  When the drive is at standstill, the measuring system is set via the bit 8 («HomStartStop») in control word. The current actual position now corresponds to the home position set in C01227/2 the machine measuring system. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 569: Home Position & Home Value Offset

  4 / 5 dnActPos_p — dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bHomingMark_TRUE_to_FALSE) 6 / 7 dnActPos_p — dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bHomingMark_TRUE_to_FALSE) dnActPos_p — dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bLimitSwitchPos_TRUE_to_FALSE) dnActPos_p — dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bLimitSwitchNeg_TRUE_to_FALSE) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 570: Option «Actual Mctrl Position Received At Mains Switch-Off

  If the MCKInterface is connected upstream to the Motion Control Kernel and if the operating mode is requested at the L_MckCtrlInterface FB, the wOperationMode and bOperationMode_1…8 process inputs are available. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 571: Execute Homing

  FALSETRUE The internal status «reference known» is reset. • The inverter is no longer referenced. • The process outputs bHomePosAvailable and bHomingDone are reset to FALSE. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 572: Homing On The Fly

   I/O level  Application level  Setting of the home position  Selection of the home position [8-28] Modified interconnection for selecting the home position Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 573: Manual Jog

  If travel range monitoring has been deactivated, the drive can travel into a mechanical limit during manual jogging and machine parts can be destroyed or damaged! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 574: Parameter Setting

  Manual jog: Breakpoint 4 0.0000 unit  Note! For trouble-free operation, the Machine parameters (at least gearbox factor and feed constant) must also be set correctly! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 575: Functional Settings

  Bit 7 Position controller off In the «manual jog» operating mode, the position controller is deactivated. Thus, the compensation of the following error is switched off. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 576: Smooth Start And Quick Stop Of The Drive

  ManJogPos TRUE FALSE ManExecute2ndSpeed TRUE FALSE  C01231/1: Manual jog: Speed 1  C01231/2: Manual jog: Speed 2 [8-30] Example: Change-over to second speed Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 577: Time-Based Start Of Second Speed

  2 so that it is higher than manual jog speed 1, you can enable longer distances to be travelled by means of manual jogging with this function. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 578: Requesting The Operating Mode

  BOOL FALSE Speed 1 (C01231/1) active. TRUE Speed 2 (C01231/2) active. bReleaseLimitSwitch Retract operated limit switch BOOL TRUE Retract operated limit switch (in opposite direction) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 579: Manual Jog To Limit Position

  (C01232/2) to the position ManJogPos of the corresponding software limit TRUE position. FALSE  Positive software limit position [8-32] Example: Manual jog to positive software limit position Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 580
  C00595/2.  ManJogPos TRUE FALSE  Positive limit switch  Deceleration ramp of the quick stop function [8-33] Example: Manual jog to positive limit switch Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 581: Retracting Of An Operated Limit Switch

  A limit switch that is in the operated state can also be moved away from again through manual jogging in the retracting direction by means of control bits 4/5 (ManJogPos/ManJogNeg). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 582: Positioning

  • 15 different profiles can be parameterised for the 8400 HighLine inverter. • You can find a detailed explanation of all profile parameters in the subchapter entitled «Profile entry». ( 586) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 583: Possible Motion Profiles

  Profile linkage • with speed override in profile 2 Œ  Ž Profile linkage • here: forwards/backwards profile Œ  [8-34] Examples of possible motion profiles Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 584: Parameter Setting

  Greyed out = display parameter  Note! For trouble-free operation, the Machine parameters (at least gearbox factor and feed constant) must also be set correctly! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 585: Functional Settings

  Continuing the setpoint Positioning from the setpoint printed in bold = Lenze setting; x = any state; * see note on bit 4 in table above Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 586: Profile Entry

  Profile data set (profile numbers 1 … 15), in which the profile data are stored. Mode (C01300/1…15) Selection of the way in which positioning is to be carried out. Positioning modes ( 589) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 587
   Constant acceleration (L-profile) v [unit/s]  Linearly increasing acceleration (S-profile) Œ t [s] v [unit/s]  t [s] Deceleration (C01304/1…15) Maximum deceleration during the positioning process. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 588
  TP signal source (C01309/1…15) Selection of the signal source for touch probe detection. • Only relevant for positioning modes with touch-probe. Touch probe positioning ( 590) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 589: Positioning Modes

  • Reference for the absolute position is the zero position. 12 Absolute (Ccw) on TP • In this direction, the zero position of the axis can be exceeded. (from version 06.00.00) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 590: Touch Probe Positioning

  In the Lenze setting of C02810/x, no touch probe is detected! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 591: S-Ramp Time For Jerk Limitation

  6. Deceleration according to deceleration profile (Dec) 4. Reduce acceleration (jerk limitation) 8 Reduce deceleration (jerk limitation) 5th Traversing with Vel according to speed profile 9 Standstill (position target reached) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 592
   t = 1 s jerk_max For this reason, you must only set plausible S-ramp times (this should not exceed half the value of t Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 593: Requesting The Operating Mode

  The profile 0 is no valid profile for the «positioning» operating mode. If a driving request with an invalid profile number is started, the response set in C00595/12 occurs (Lenze setting: «WarningLocked»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 594: Starting/Cancelling A Traversing Task

  Related topics: Target position monitoring (status «drive in target») ( 541) Monitoring of the maximum travel distance ( 543) Following error monitoring system ( 544) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 595: Override Of The Parameterised Positioning Mode

  Continuous to TP Relative to TP Absolute (Cw) to TP Absolute (Ccw) to TP * From version 06.00.00 All other possible settings are reserved for future extensions! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 596: Position Teaching

  Teach current position BOOL TRUE Teach current position into the selected profile.  Note! If request is made at the same time, the current position is taught. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 597: Stop

  If the MCKInterface is connected upstream to the Motion Control Kernel and if the operating mode is requested at the L_MckCtrlInterface FB, the wOperationMode and bOperationMode_1…8 process inputs are available. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 598: Position Follower

   Phase 1: assume synchronous position. In this phase, dnPosSetValue_p = constant.  Phase 2: position follower operation [8-35] Signal flow — position follower Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 599: Parameter Setting

  If this function is activated via bit 7 in C01218, the position controller is deactivated in this operating mode. Hence, following error control is switched-off. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 600: Requesting The Operating Mode

  If the bDeltaPosOn process input is set to TRUE, a position difference (following error) is compensated for which is not internally generated from setpoint/actual positions but must be defined via the dnDeltaPos_p process input instead. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 601: Override

  • Synchronising processes • Setpoint controls via external setpoints • Abort via input bPosStop • Speed setpoint selection in case of error (e. g. «Fail-QSP») Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 602: Speed Override

  C0909/x in the motor control, a following error is generated. C0909/x should always be parameterised greater than or equalling the max. possible speed override value. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 603: Acceleration Override

  «Ramping up» from the acceleration defined with override to the acceleration set in the profile takes place immediately in this case. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 604: S-Ramp Smoothing Override

  Deactivate override If control bit 13 (EnableSRampOverride) is reset to «0», the S-ramp time specified by means of the profile parameters is used for profile generation. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 605: Holding Brake Control

  Examples: • Loss of the reference information after mains OFF and further spinning of the drive. • Collision with other moving machine parts. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 606: Internal Interfaces

  • For speed control: 100 % ≡ reference speed (C00011) • For torque control: 100 % ≡ maximum torque (C00057) Feedforward control of the motor before release Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 607
   Tip! For direct triggering of a holding brake, the high current output of the 8400 HighLine inverter can be used that can switch max. 2.5 A. For this purpose, connect the bMBrakeReleaseOut trigger signal to the bOutHC input of the SB LS_DigitalOutput.

• Page 608: Parameter Setting

  C02581/4 Holding brake: FF control starting value 1 C02581/5 Holding brake: FF control starting value 2 C02582 Holding brake: Setting Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 609: Operating Mode

  • The bMBrakeReleased status signal is set to FALSE.  Note! In the Lenze setting, the mode 0 is preset to get into a safe state after the mains is switched on. Mode 11: Manual control In this mode, brake release and brake application can be directly controlled via the bMBrakeRelease input without special logic or automatic.

• Page 610
  • the brake in this mode also closes when the controller is inhibited in order to prevent the axis in a hoist from falling. Related topics: ( 120) TroubleQSP Behaviour in case of pulse inhibit ( 620) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 611: Functional Settings

  • «0» ≡ As before, the ramp time set in C02610/1 is used. Note: The changeover can be dynamically both via the ramp parameter and via bit 6. Bit 7 Reserved Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 612: Switching Thresholds

  Related topics: Process when brake is released ( 617) Process when brake is closed ( 618) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 613: Application And Release Time

  • Contact elements used (brake module or contactor at the digital output) • Type of overvoltage limitation/suppressor circuit For optimisation purposes, detect in individual cases the response times by measurement. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 614
  [8-39] Oscillogram 2: Current characteristic for the release of a mechanical holding brake (release time: 36.8 ms) Related topics: Process when brake is released ( 617) Process when brake is closed ( 618) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 615: Ramp Time For Approaching The Setpoint Speed

  • Mechanical delay of the holding brake itself • Generation of the holding torque by the motor Related topics: Process when brake is released ( 617) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 616: Motor Magnetising Time (Only With Asynchronous Motor)

  In the Lenze setting, the actual speed time monitoring is deactivated (C02593/1 = «0 s»), i.e. the brake will only be applied when the actual speed has reached the lower switching threshold. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 617: Process When Brake Is Released

   C02610/1: Ramp time for approaching the setpoint speed [8-41] Release holding brake in automatic mode via speed threshold Related topics: Feedforward control of the motor before release ( 621) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 618: Process When Brake Is Closed

   C02581/3: Hysteresis for application  C02593/2: Application delay  C02589/1: Application time [8-42] Close holding brake in automatic mode via speed threshold (actual value = setpoint) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 619
   C02593/1: Actual value monitoring time  C02589/1: Application time [8-43] Close holding brake in automatic mode with actual value monitoring time (C02593/1 > 0 s) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 620: Behaviour In Case Of Pulse Inhibit

  In case of vertical motion (bit 3 = 0), this function is not active due to safety-related reasons. Related topics: Functional settings ( 611) Switching thresholds ( 612) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 621: Feedforward Control Of The Motor Before Release

  (C02582: Bit 2 = 1) n ≥ 0 horizontal/winding drive Inversion via bit 2 with horizontal direction not (C02582: Bit 3 = 1) effective n < 0 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 622
  If the servo control (SC) operating mode has been selected, an additive torque value in [%] can be selected via the nBrkTorqueAdd_a input. Related topics: Functional settings ( 611) Switching thresholds ( 612) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 623: Diagnostics & Error Management

  For many device errors, the error type and hence the response of the inverter to the error can be parameterised. Setting the error response ( 642) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 624: Led Status Displays

  ( 625) DRV-ERR Warning/trouble/fault Related topics: Device control (DCTRL) ( 98) Device state machine and device states ( 112) System bus «CAN on board» ( 700) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 625: Led Status Displays Of The Device Status

  LED is flashing twice approx. every 1.25 seconds (double flash) LED is blinking every second LED is permanently on Related topics: Device state machine and device states ( 112) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 626: Drive Diagnostics With The »Engineer

  • Cause of quick stop (C00159) • Status word (C00150) • Status word 2 (C00155) Device information… Display identification data, e.g. firmware information or serial number of individual inverter components. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 627
  System bus «CAN on board» ( 700) • X6 diagnostic interface We recommend this diagnostic connection when the X1 CAN interface is used for process communication. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 628: Display Details Of The Error

  Related topics: Structure of the 32-bit error number (bit coding) ( 647) Structure of the 16 bit error number (bit coding) ( 650) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 629: Drive Diagnostics Via Keypad/Bus System

  The power outputs are inhibited.   System fault active Fault Fault ( 122)  Trouble Trouble ( 121)  TroubleQSP TroubleQSP ( 120)  Warning is active  Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 630
  Switching cycles mains switching C00177/2 Switching cycles output relay C00177/3 Stress counter — short circuit C00177/4 Stress counter — earth fault C00177/5 Stress meter clamp Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 631
  Firmware of the control card and the power section C00203/1…9 Product type code of the individual device components C00204/1…9 Serial numbers of the individual device components Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 632: Logbook

  This ensures that the error history of the device does not get lost. For this reason it is very important to act with caution when deleting the logbook entries. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 633: Filtering Logbook Entries

  Lenze setting. Instead, one counter will be counted up for this error. • The time of the error is always the time of its first occurrence. Hence, a new logbook line will only be generated if a new error occurs.

• Page 634
  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ • The analog signal to be recorded is selected in C00164/1. • Scaling of the value recorded: 16384 ≡ 100 % Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 635: Reading Out Logbook Entries

  OnlineGo online command to build up an online connection with the inverter. 3. Select the Diagnostics tab from the Workspace. 4. Click Logbook. Example: Representation of the logbook in the »Engineer« V2.13 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 636: Exporting Logbook Entries To A File

  • Hidden logbook entries are not exported, i.e. the filter criteria specified are accounted for during the export. • The logbook entries are written to the file in the form of a semicolon separated list. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 637: Storing The Logbook In The Project

  • When the project is closed, you are asked to save the changed project. • Only if the changed project is saved, the new logbook entries stored in the project remain stored. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 638: Reading Out The Logbook From An External Control/Visualisation

  (scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %) DWORD 6 Source — digital value Reserved Digital value 1 Reserved DWORD 7 Source — digital value Reserved Digital value 2 Reserved Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 639
  • The «Response index» query ensures that the logbook entry read really corresponds to the logbook entry requested. Related topics: Structure of the 32-bit error number (bit coding) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 640: Monitoring

  Motor phase failure monitoring ( 305) Mains phase failure monitoring ( 308) Maximum current monitoring ( 308) Maximum torque monitoring ( 310) Encoder open-circuit monitoring ( 311) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 641: Monitoring Configuration

  • The 8400 monitoring configuration dialog box is displayed via which the desired settings can be made: Related topics: Setting the error response ( 642) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 642: Setting The Error Response

  • The corresponding preset threshold values can be changed via the following parameters: Parameters Info C00120 Setting of motor overload (I²xt) C00123 Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt) C00572 Brake resistor overload threshold C00599 Motor phase failure threshold Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 643: Autofailreset Function

  • 2: WarningLocked • 3: All locking C00189 Response after max. number of unsuccessful error reset processes has been reached Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 644: Maloperation Of The Drive

  C00089: Rated motor frequency C00090: Rated motor voltage C00091: Motor cosine phi C00092: Motor magnetising inductance Motor windings are wired incorrectly Reverse from star connection to delta connection Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 645
  Motor phase (LP1) Monitoring is not active (C00597 = 0) Activate monitoring (C00597 = 1) monitoring does not respond if the motor phases are interrupted Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 646: Operation Without Mains Supply

  C00054 Motor current C00058 Output frequency C00061 Heatsink temperature C00064/1…3 Device utilisation (Ixt) C00066 Thermal motor load (I²xt) C00177 Switching cycles C00725 Current switching frequency Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 647: Error Messages Of The Operating System

  • For the sake of legibility, the error number in the logbook and in C00165 is displayed with the following syntax: [Error type].[Error subject area no.].[Error ID] Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 648
  User error 4 User error 5 Errors generated by the user (by the application) via the LS_SetError_2 system block. User error 8 Error ID Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 649
  • Thus, error number «142278671» means: A DC bus undervoltage has been detected in the «Motor management / encoder» subject area. The error response is a «Fault». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 650: Structure Of The 16 Bit Error Number (Bit Coding)

  Errors that are reported by the extension module, and Yes if it is a fieldbus error. communication errors to the plugged-in extension module. CAN integrated (general) Errors related to general CAN functions. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 651: Reset Error Message

  When an online connection to the inverter has been established, use the Diagnostics tab of »Engineer« and click Reset error to reset a pending error message. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 652: Export Error Texts

   How to export the error texts into a text file: 1. Go to the Project view in the Context menu of the 8400 HighLine inverter and execute the Export error texts… command. 2. Define the following options in the Export error texts dialog box: •…

• Page 653: Short Overview (A-Z)

  WarningLocked C00595/14 0x8600 xx.0184.00015 0x5405 21509 12058629 Ck15: Error message sig. brake TroubleQuickStop 0x8600 xx.0184.00005 0x5440 21568 12058688 Ck16: Time overrun manual operation Fault xx.0184.00064 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 654
  0x8300 xx.0123.00001 0x175d 5981 8061021 ot2: Speed controller output limited No Reaction C00567 0xF000 xx.0123.00093 0x170e 5902 8060942 OU: DC bus overvoltage Trouble 0x3100 xx.0123.00014 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 655
  + C161/8* User error 8 No Reaction C00581/8 0x6200 xx.0987.00004 * Only the lower 8 bits of the adjustable error ID (C161/x) can be used. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 656: Cause & Possible Remedies

  8400, the DC terminals of which are connected downstream to the charging connection for the voltage DC bus (e.g. 9400 from 45 kW with 8400) contact Lenze. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 657
  • If required, clean or replace the fan. • Provide for sufficient cooling of the device. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 658
  Check and, if required, correct dimensioning of the load with regard to the installed device power. • The instantaneous value of the motor current has exceeded the limit value set in C00939. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 659
  (Imax controller) is set incorrectly, this error message may also occur. Motor control: Defining current limits Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 660
  The device has recognised that the maximum speed has • Limit setpoint selection to maximum values. been reached. • Adjust set speed limitation (C00909) and frequency limitation (C00910). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 661
  Enter sensible values for cable cross-section and motor the calculation of the motor cable resistance. cable length. • The parameters for cable cross-section and cable length are implausible. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 662
  The device indicates that the «CLAMP» overcurrent Reduce setpoint generation dynamics or motor load. limitation has been activated. • A permanent clamp operation causes an overload disconnection. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 663
  Select the correct maximum speed as a function of the reached. switching frequency. • The maximum speed has been exceeded depending Motor control: Determine speed limits on the switching frequency. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 664
  «0: No Reaction». • Observe load requirements. • Correct dimensioning if necessary. • For VFCplus control type: Check Vmin boost (C00016). Set Vmin boost Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 665
  • Check wiring of the input terminals for open circuit or evaluation is activated if «4: encoder signal FreqIn1256» loose contact. is selected as speed or position encoder (C00495/1 FreqIn1267/5). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 666
  • Damaged cable (e.g. loose contact). • Assign different IDs to nodes. • Two nodes with the same ID. • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 667
  Bit 14 («SetFail») in the wCANControl control word of the Trace back signal source on the CAN bus that sets bit 14 LS_DriveInterface system block has been set. («SetFail»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 668
  • In case of an incompatibility, either the module or the software of the standard device is out of date. In this case, please contact Lenze. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 669
  If you save the parameter set to a higher device version, you can no longer load this parameter set to a lower device version. Replacement of the inverter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 670
  It is not possible for Lenze to modify a replacement device via special accesses in such a way that it cooperates with a personalised memory module. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 671
   0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy Device error Please contact Lenze. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 672
   0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy Device error Mains switching • Please contact Lenze if the problem occurs again. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 673
  MCK: The device has detected that the position is outside • Increase permissible traversing range (change setting the positive software limit position (C01229/1). of the software limit positions). • Deactivate software limit position monitoring. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 674
  • The online connection between the PC and the • Adjust the timeout (C00464/1). inverter has been interrupted for a longer period of time than the timeout set in C00464/1. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 675
   0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy MCK: The positioning mode defined via the Define a valid positioning mode. wPosProfileMode input is not supported. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 676
  Check the configuration and parameterisation of the block has occurred. L_MckCtrlInterface_1 FB. In this regard, also observe the status messages of the FB (wFailState or C01299 output). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 677
   0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy User error 1 has been tripped via the bSetError1 input of User-defined. LS_SetError_1 system block. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 678
   0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy User error 7 has been tripped via the bSetError3 input of User-defined. LS_SetError_2 system block. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 679
   0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy User error 8 has been tripped via the bSetError4 input of User-defined. LS_SetError_2 system block. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 680: Ls_Seterror_1″ System Block

  65535 Error ID for user errors 1 … 4 C00581/1…4 Response to user errors 1 … 4 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 681: Ls_Seterror_2″ System Block

  65535 Error ID for user errors 5 … 8 C00581/5…8 Response to user errors 5 … 8 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 682: Oscilloscope Function

  • Linking channel values with arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction and multiplication) • Simple signal analysis by frequency transformation of time signals with FFT («Fast Fourier Transformation»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 683: Technical Data

  In the engineering tool, you set the trigger condition and sample rate and select the signal sources to be recorded via the oscilloscope user interface when an online connection to the 8400 HighLine has been established. In this case, «signal sources» are the internal output signals of the function, system, application and port blocks.

• Page 684: Operation

   Note! Recording can only be started when an online connection has been established to the 8400 HighLine. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 685: User Interface

  Selecting the signal sources to be recorded  Status bar  Input field for comments Last settings   Settings Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 686
  Loading the oscillogram file ( 697) Upload recorded oscillogram from device • Transfer values from the measured value memory of the 8400 HighLine to the Engineering PC. • Only possible when an online connection has been established to the 8400 HighLine.

• Page 687: Selecting The Signal Sources To Be Recorded

  • The position value determines the vertical position of the zero point of the y axis of a curve with regard to the vertical curve scale (- 5 … + 5). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 688: Selecting The Recording Time/Sample Rate

  1. Select the desired time base from the time base list field. • The current time base setting multiplied by ten results in the recording time. • Since the measured value memory of the 8400 HighLine has a limited capacity, usually a compromise is made between sample rate and recording time.

• Page 689: Selecting The Trigger Condition

  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 10.2.4 Selecting the trigger condition The trigger condition serves to define the starting time of recording in the 8400 HighLine. The oscilloscope provides various trigger conditions by means of which recording of the measured values can be controlled.

• Page 690
  For triggering on a different signal source: • The current value must be different than the last value in order that the trigger is activated. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 691: Starting Recording

  To obtain a maximum sample rate when recording the signal source values, the data are first stored in the measured value memory of the 8400 HighLine and then transferred to the Engineering PC. The current recording status is displayed in the status bar.

• Page 692
  4. Go to the oscilloscope toolbar and click the arrow next to the symbol to set all the displayed curves to the Y position «0». This way, the curves are displayed «above one another». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 693: Cursor Function: Reading Individual Measured Values

  • The status bar displays the position of both measuring lines and the difference between them. 2. Select the channel for which individual measured values are to be indicated from the Channel list field. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 694: Last Settings

  10.2.9 Last settings All information included in the Last settings tab refer to the oscillogram loaded into the device: The contents cannot be changed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 695: Managing Oscillograms

  The Comment text field serves to enter a comment on the selected oscillogram. • If you execute the Saving the oscillogram in a file command, the comment is saved together with the oscillogram in the file. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 696: Saving The Oscillogram In A File

  • A new window opens in which the directory and the file name for the oscillogram to be saved have to the specified. 3. Click the Save button. • The dialog box is closed and the current oscillogram is saved. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 697: Loading The Oscillogram File

  • If the configuration to be loaded contains signal sources that are no longer available in the device, these variables are automatically removed from the configuration. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 698: Overlay Function

  • Removing signal sources from the device oscillogram causes the characteristics in the MERGE oscillogram to be deleted. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 699: Deleting An Oscillogram File Saved In The Project

  2. Select one or several oscillogram files from the upper list field. 3. Press the Delete selected file… button. • The selected file(s) is/are deleted and the dialog box is closed. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 700: System Bus «Can On Board

  CANopen interface classified in different subcategories. • Information on CAN communication modules and CANopen interfaces of other Lenze devices is provided in the «CAN» communication manual in the Lenze library. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 701: General Information

  CANopen provides only one active parameter channel. The system bus (CANopen) of the Inverter Drives 8400 is a further development of the system bus (CAN) including the following properties: •…

• Page 702: Supported Protocols

  Transmitting and receiving a sync telegram • Synchronisation of the internal time base to the reception of the CAN sync telegram is possible.Synchronisation of the internal time base Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 703: Communication Time

  • Parameter data: approx. 5 ms (typical value) • For parameters concerning the motor control (e.g. C00011), the processing time may be longer (up to 30 ms). • Process data: 1 ms Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 704: Possible Settings Via Dip Switch

  The system bus must be terminated between CAN low and CAN high at the first and last physical node each by a resistor (120 Ω). The 8400 inverter is provided with an integrated bus terminating resistor, which can be activated via the unlabelled DIP switch.

• Page 705: Setting The Baud Rate

  • All DIP switches (a … d, 1 … 64) = OFF (Lenze setting): • At switching on, the settings under code C00350 (node address) and C00351 (baud rate) will become active. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 706: Led Status Displays For The System Bus

  (CAN-ERR is blinking twice, then off for 1 second) Sync Message Error (only possible in the «Operational» state) (CAN-ERR is blinking three times, then off for 1 second) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 707: Going Online Via The System Bus

  = «1: On / start» device command reinitialises the CANopen interface of the inverter («Reset node»), which is required after e.g. changing the data transfer rate, the node address or the identifiers, respectively. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 708: Structure Of The Can Data Telegram

  Exception: The identifier for process data/heartbeat/emergency objects as well as network management and sync telegrams is freely assigned by the user (either manually or automatically by the network configurator), or is permanently assigned. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 709
  • The basic identifiers for network management (NMT) and the basic SDO channel (SDO1) are defined in the CANopen protocol and cannot be changed. • The basic identifiers of the PDOs are preset in the Lenze setting according to the «Predefined Connection Set» of DS301 V4.02.

• Page 710: User Data

  • Parameter data are, for instance, operating parameters, diagnostic information and motor data as well as control information on the interconnection of function blocks in the I/O level of the FB Editor. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 711: Communication Phases/Network Management

  Part of the initialisation or the entire initialisation can be carried out anew in every status by transferring the corresponding network management telegrams. The current CAN status is displayed in C00359 for diagnostic purposes. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 712: Status Transitions

  • A target address included in the NMT command defines the receiver(s). • If the 8400 inverter is configured as CAN master, the status is automatically changed to «Operational» after a waiting time has expired (C00356/1), and the 0x0100 («Start remote node») NMT command is transmitted to all nodes.

• Page 713: Network Management Telegram (Nmt)

  «Operational» communication status, the identifier and user data in the transmission telegram must be set as follows: • Identifier: 0x00 (network management) • User data: 0x0100 («Start remote node» NMT command to all nodes) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 714: Parameterising The Inverter As Can Master

  «Reset node» NMT telegram for the reinitialisation of the CAN-specific device parameters.  Tip! Master functionality is only required during the initialisation phase of the drive system. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 715: Process Data Transfer

  • Transmit PDOs (TPDOx): Process data object sent by a node  Note! Data can only be exchanged via process data objects if the status is «Operational»! Communication phases/network management ( 711) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 716: Available Process Data Objects

  _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 11.8.1 Available process data objects The number of available process data objects for inverters of the 8400 series depends on the device version: Process data object…

• Page 717: Rpdo1 | Port Block «Lp_Canin1

  LP_CanIn1: Mapping selection CanIn C00409/1 LP_CanIn1: wCtrl MapVal C00409/2 LP_CanIn1: wIn2 MapVal C00409/3 LP_CanIn1: wIn3 MapVal C00409/4 LP_CanIn1: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 718
  • From version 12.00.00 • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/3 C00409/4. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 719: Rpdo2 | «Lp_Canin2» Port Block

  LP_CanIn2: Mapping selection CanIn C00409/5 LP_CanIn2: wIn1 MapVal C00409/6 LP_CanIn2: wIn2 MapVal C00409/7 LP_CanIn2: wIn3 MapVal C00409/8 LP_CanIn2: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 720
  • From version 12.00.00 • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/7 C00409/8. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 721: Rpdo3 | «Lp_Canin3» Port Block

  LP_CanIn3: Mapping selection CanIn C00409/9 LP_CanIn3: wIn1 MapVal C00409/10 LP_CanIn3: wIn2 MapVal C00409/11 LP_CanIn3: wIn3 MapVal C00409/12 LP_CanIn3: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 722
  • From version 12.00.00 • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/11 C00409/12. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 723: Rpdo4 | «Lp_Canin4» Port Block

  LP_CanIn4: Mapping Selection CanIn C00409/13 LP_CanIn4: wIn1 MapVal C00409/14 LP_CanIn4: wIn2 MapVal C00409/15 LP_CanIn4: wIn3 MapVal C00409/16 LP_CanIn4: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 724
  C00407/8 LP_CanIn4: dwIn34 MapVal • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/15 C00409/16. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 725: Tpdo1 | «Lp_Canout1» Port Block

  Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut1: Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401/2 LP_CanOut1: Inversion bState_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/1 LP_CanOut1:wState C00868/2 LP_CanOut1:wOut2 C00868/3 LP_CanOut1:wOut3 C00868/4 LP_CanOut1: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 726: Tpdo2 | «Lp_Canout2» Port Block

  Info Lenze setting C00401/4 LP_CanOut2: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/5 LP_CanOut2: wOut1 C00868/6 LP_CanOut2: wOut2 C00868/7 LP_CanOut2: wOut3 C00868/8 LP_CanOut2: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 727: Tpdo3 | «Lp_Canout3» Port Block

  Info Lenze setting C00401/6 LP_CanOut3: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/9 LP_CanOut3: wOut1 C00868/10 LP_CanOut3: wOut2 C00868/11 LP_CanOut3: wOut3 C00868/12 LP_CanOut3: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 728: Tpdo4 | «Lp_Canout4» Port Block

  Info Lenze setting C00401/8 LP_CanOut4: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/13 LP_CanOut4: wOut1 C00868/14 LP_CanOut4: wOut2 C00868/15 LP_CanOut4: wOut3 C00868/16 LP_CanOut4: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 729: Identifiers Of The Process Data Objects

  • Identifier (COB-ID) = C0354/x Lenze setting: Basic identifiers according to the «Predefined Connection Set» of DS301 V4.02 In the Lenze setting, the identifiers for the process data objects PDO1 … PDO4 consist of the node address set in C00350 and a basic identifier (CANBaseID) which corresponds to the «Predefined…

• Page 730
  After a node address change (C00350) and a CAN reset node afterwards, the subcodes of C00354 automatically resume the values which result from the respective basic identifier and the set node address. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 731: Transmission Type

  For a cyclic transmission, a cycle time must be entered for the respective PDO. In this case, cyclic transmission takes place in addition to event-controlled transmission. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 732
  The communication parameters can also be set via the following CANopen objects: • I-1400 … I-1403: Communication parameters for RPDO1 … RPDO4 • I-1800 … I-1803: Communication parameters for TPDO1 … TPDO4 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 733: Synchronisation Of Pdos Via Sync Telegram

  CAN SYNC Tx identifier 0x0080  C00369 CAN sync transmission cycle time 0 ms  Related topics: Synchronisation of the internal time base ( 787) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 734: Monitoring Of The Rpdos For Data Reception

  Bit 9  Reserved Bit 10  Reserved Bit 11  Reserved Bit 12  Reserved Bit 13  Reserved Bit 14  Trouble Bit 15  Fault Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 735
   Exception event (an error has occurred) [11-7] General signal flow in the event of a configured exception Related topics: Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 364) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 736: Parameter Data Transfer

  Lenze setting according to CANopen. • In order to activate both parameter data channels according to the previous behaviour, set «2 SDO Lenze» in C00366. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 737: Identifiers Of The Parameter Data Objects

  11.9.1 Identifiers of the parameter data objects In the Lenze setting, the basic identifiers of the SDOs are preset according to the «Predefined Connection Set». The identifiers of the parameter data objects SDO1 and SDO2 result from the basic identifier and…

• Page 738: Command

  *Bit coding of the length: 00 = 4 bytes, 01 = 3 bytes, 10 = 2 bytes, 11 = 1 byte e: expedited (shortened block service) s: segmented (normal block service)  Tip! More commands are defined in CANopen specification DS301, V4.02 (e.g. segmented transfer). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 739: Addressing By Means Of Index And Subindex

  3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6. byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0xF4 0x5F 0x00 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 740: Data 1

  Example A value of «123.45» is to be transmitted for a code, unit: «%» (e.g. C00039/1: «Fixed setpoint-JOG1»). In inverters of the 8400 series, parameters with the «%» unit have two decimal positions and hence a scaling factor of «100».

• Page 741: Error Messages

  1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6. byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Error code 0x41 0x00 0x04 0x06 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 742
  Dynamic generation of object directory failed or no object directory available (e.g. object directory generated from file, generation not possible because of a file error). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 743: Parameter Data Telegram Examples

  = 0x4B = «Read Response» (response to the read request with current value) Index as in telegram to the drive Subindex Data 1 … 2 = 0x002B = 43 [°C] Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 744: Write Parameters

  (1408 = SDO1 basic identifier from the inverter) Command = 0x60 = «Write response» (Acknowledgement of the write access from the inverter) Index as in telegram to the drive Subindex Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 745: Read Block Parameters

  = 0x41 = «Read response» (response is block telegram) Index as in telegram to the drive Subindex Data 1 … 4 = 0x0000000B = data length of 11 characters in the ASCII format Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 746
  • The 2nd response of the inverter in the command byte is «0b00011*0000» if bytes 2 … 8 are completely filled with data and other telegrams are following. * Toggle bit Data 1 … 7 = «01.00.0» (ASCII representation) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 747
  • Bits 1 … 3 reveal the number of bytes that do not contain any data anymore. * Toggle bit Data 1 … 7 = «0.00» (ASCII representation) The result of the data block transmission is: «01.00.00.00» Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 748: Monitoring

  • EMC interferences on the system bus (e.g. since the CAN bus cable next to the motor cable is unshielded.) C00364 displays whether such an error is active. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 749: Heartbeat Protocol

  Decimal value Producer status (s) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Boot-up Stopped Operational Pre-Operational Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 750: Parameter Setting

  • The NMT master receives an emergency telegram containing emergency error code 0x8130. • The response parameterised in C00592/5 is activated (Lenze setting: «No response»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 751: Commissioning Example

  11.10.2.3 Commissioning example Task An 8400 inverter (node 2) which is configured as heartbeat consumer is to monitor another 8400 inverter (heartbeat producer, node 1). • The heartbeat producer is to transmit a heartbeat telegram to the heartbeat consumer every 10 ms.

• Page 752: Emergency Telegram

  Generic error Error messages of the operating system Corresponding error-free message: Value «0x00000000»  Tip! A detalied description can be found in CAN specification DS301, V4.02. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 753: Canopen Objects Implemented

  COB-ID client −> server (rx) COB-ID server −> client (tx) I-1201 SDO2 server parameter Highest subindex supported COB-ID client −> server (rx) COB-ID server −> client (tx) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 754
  Application object 1 … 4 C00409/13…16 C00866/13…16 I-1800 TPDO1 communication parameter Highest subindex supported COB-ID used by TPDO C00355/2 Transmission type C00322/1 Inhibit time C00324/2 Event timer C00356/5 C00369 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 755
  Application object 1 … 4 C00868/9…12 I-1A03 TPDO4 mapping parameter (from version 15.00.00) Number of mapped application objects in PDO 1 … 4 Application object 1 … 4 C00868/13…16 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 756
  Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Error status No error Device error message Communication error Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 757
  Collision of COB-IDs: An ID parameterised for reception is also used 0x11 for transmission. 0x8210 PDO length shorter than expected 0x11 0x8220 PDO length greater than expected 0x11 0x8700 Monitoring of the sync telegram 0x11 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 758
  I-1006. Writing identifiers To receive PDOs, the value 0x80 must be entered in the 11-bit identifier in the Lenze setting (and according to CANopen specification) . This means that all modules are by default set to the same sync telegram.
• Page 759
  0 Emergency object is valid. 1 Emergency object is invalid.  Note! The identifier can only be changed in the «emergency object invalid» status (bit 31 = 1). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 760
  Bit 31 … bit 24 Bit 23 … Bit 16 Bit 15 … Bit 0 Node ID Heartbeat time (Reserved) in [ms] [11-4] Data telegram assignment Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 761
  Product code 84001 8400 BaseLine C 84002 8400 StateLine C 84003 8400 HighLine C 84004 8400 TopLine C Main and subversion of firmware Serial number Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 762
  Extended identifier* 11-bit identifier * The extended identifier is not supported. Bit 11 … bit 29 must be set to «0». [11-5] Data telegram assignment Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 763
  • The SDO server parameter is only valid, if bit 31 is set to «0» for both transmission directions (subindex 1 and 2). • In the Lenze setting, the SDO server channels 2 are deactivated (bit 31 = «1»). • The identifier can only be changed if the SDO is invalid (bit 31 = «1»).
• Page 764
  Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0x23 0x01 0x12 0x02 0xC4 0x05 0x00 0x00 [11-10] User data assignment for writing to subindex 2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 765
  RTR to this PDO possible (cannot be set) RTR to this PDO not possible (Lenze) PDO active PDO not active [11-12] I-1400 … I-1402, subindex 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 766
  • For data telegram assignment and description of subindices 1 and 2, see object I-1400. How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to «1»). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to «0»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 767
  • For data telegram assignment and description of subindices 1 and 2, see object I-1400. How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to «1»). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to «0»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 768
  • For data telegram assignment and description of subindices 1 and 2, see object I-1400. How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to «1»). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to «0»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 769
  [11-14] Data telegram assignment IEC 61131 process data words are mapped. Only whole bytes can be mapped (1-byte/mapping entry). Related topics: RPDO1 | Port block «LP_CanIn1» ( 717) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 770
  • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1600. Related topics: RPDO3 | «LP_CanIn3» port block ( 721) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 771
  • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1600. Related topics: RPDO4 | «LP_CanIn4» port block ( 723) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 772
  1 PDO inactive How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to «1»). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to «0»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 773
  For cyclic operation (transmission type 254), the cycle time for sending the process data object on the system bus can be set under subindex 5: The entered value corresponds to the time in [ms]. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 774
  • For data telegram assignment and description of subindices, see object I-1800. How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to «1»). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to «0»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 775
  • For data telegram assignment and description of subindices, see object I-1800. How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to «1»). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to «0»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 776
  • For data telegram assignment and description of subindices, see object I-1800. How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to «1»). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to «0»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 777
  • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1A00. Related topics: TPDO2 | «LP_CanOut2» port block ( 726) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 778
  • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1A00. Related topics: TPDO4 | «LP_CanOut4» port block ( 728) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 779: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Canmanagement

  1 second. Hence, 1 second after the «Bus off» has occurred, the inverter will automatically be active again on the system bus («Auto bus off recovery»). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 780: Fieldbus Interface (Mci)

  INTERBUS (E84AYCIB) PROFIBUS® (E84AYCPM) PROFINET® (E84AYCER)  Detailed information is provided in the communication manual (KHB) for the respective fieldbus and in the »Engineer« online help. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 781: Process Data Transfer

  These port blocks are also called process data channels. • The process data are not saved in the inverter. [12-1] External and internal data transfer between bus system, inverter and function block interconnection Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 782
  • the signal mapping of the PDOs. • The process data objects (e.g. the meaning of the control word bits or the speed setpoint stipulated) are interpreted in the inverter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 783: Control Mode «Mci

  The predefined assignment of the MCI-PDOs can be parameterised by means of PDO mapping and can be freely configured on the I/O level in the function block editor (FB editor). Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 784: Port Block «Lp_Mciin

  Info Lenze setting C00876/1 LP_MciIn:wCtrl C00876/2…16 LP_MciIn: wIn2 … wIn16 C00890/1 LP_MciIn: Inversion bCtrl_B0..15 0x0000 C00890/3 LP_MciIn: Inversion bIn2_B0..15 0x0000 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 785: Port Block «Lp_Mciout

  Info Lenze setting C00877/1 LP_MciOut:wState C00877/2…16 LP_MciOut: wOut2 … wOut16 C00890/2 LP_MciOut: Inversion bState_B0..15 0x0000 C00890/4 LP_MciOut: Inversion bOut2_B0..15 0x0000 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 786: Can Gateway

  • The parameters of the communication module (C13000 … C13999) are always processed in the own inverter. • The parameters C00387/1 (CAN gateway address) and C00350 (CAN node address) are not transferred to the remote device. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 787: Synchronisation Of The Internal Time Base

  Example: For the CAN bus, 2 ms has been selected as interval between two synchronisation signals. If the CAN bus is to be used as synchronisation source, a cycle time setpoint of 2000 μs must be selected in C01121. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 788: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Syncmanagement

  The SB LS_SyncManagement provides status information for synchronising the internal time base: Outputs Designator Value/meaning Data type bSyncSignalOK TRUE Sync signal OK BOOL bSyncPhaseOK TRUE Sync phase position OK BOOL Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 789: Parameter Change-Over

   Motor data changeover  Motor changeover (e.g. via motor contactors) [14-1] Principle of the selective control of multiple motors using one inverter Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 790: Configuring Parameter Change-Over Via The »Engineer« Parameterisation Dialog

  If you do not require this basic function anymore, delete the composed parameter list in order that no unwanted parameter write operations take place. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 791: Configuring The Parameter List(S)

  WriteParamList. • Here, you can use the <Ctrl> key and the<Shift> key for multiple selection, as in the case of general Windows functions. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 792
  ( 797) • The preset values are changed in the same way as the definable parameter list. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 793
  For cross-device reuse of the configured WriteParamList, you can click on the Export and Import buttons to save the parameter selection as an *.epc file and then to re-import the saved *.epc file into another 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 794: Configuring Control Inputs

  Selection value set — 2 Value set used FALSE FALSE Value set 1 TRUE FALSE Value set 2 FALSE TRUE Value set 3 TRUE TRUE Value set 4 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 795: Functional Settings

  • The parameter list will always be processed from beginning to end, even if errors occur in the meantime. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 796: Configuring The Definable Parameter List By Means Of Parameterisation

  The decision as to which value set is finally used is dependent upon the assignment of the two bSelectWriteValue_1 and bSelectWriteValue_2 inputs: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 797: Configuring The Motor Data Parameter List By Means Of Parameterisation

  • Unlike the «definable» parameter list, the motor data parameter list has a fixed assignment to the motor and control parameters. • The preset values for value sets 1 … 4 correspond to the Lenze setting of the respective motor or control parameter.

• Page 798
  C02305/6 C02305/7 C02305/8 C02853/3 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/9 C02305/10 C02305/11 C02305/12 C02853/4 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/13 C02305/14 C02305/15 C02305/16 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 799
  C02311/3 C02311/4 C02874/1 PLI without motion 0x0001 C02312/1 C02312/2 C02312/3 C02312/4 C02875/1 PLI without motion: Adaptation of ident angle 0 ° C02313/1 C02313/2 C02313/3 C02313/4 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 800: Internal Interfaces | System Block «Ls_Writeparamlist

  BOOL Value_1 Value_2 FALSE FALSE Value set 1 TRUE FALSE Value set 2 FALSE TRUE Value set 3 TRUE TRUE Value set 4 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 801
  3. An error has occurred (if bFail = TRUE). bFail «Error» status BOOL TRUE An error has occurred (group signal). • See display parameter (C01083) for details. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 802: Parameter Reference

  General information on parameter setting can be found in the chapter «Introduction: Parameterising the inverter». ( 27) For general information on how to read and change parameters, please see the online documentation for the »Engineer«. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 803: Structure Of The Parameter Descriptions

  • Parameters with read-only access • Parameters with write access Table footer The table footer contains the Parameter attributes. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 804: Data Type

  Scaling factor: 1 Representation in the »Engineer« The »Engineer« displays these parameters with a grey background or, with an online connection, with a pale-yellow background: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 805: Parameters With Write Access

  (Lenze setting printed in bold)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 806: Parameters With Bit-Coded Setting

  The »Engineer« uses a dialog box for parameter setting in which the individual bits can be set or reset. Alternatively, the value can be entered as a decimal or hexadecimal value: Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 807: Parameters With Subcodes

  Parameter is not transferred to inverter when the command Download parameter set is executed.  COM Communication-relevant parameter • This parameter is relevant for parameter data transfer via the (CAN) system bus.  MOT Motor control parameters Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 808
  In case of parameters of «VISIBLE_STRING» data type, the character length is given in addition. This is also important for the parameter access via a bus system. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 809: Parameter List

  4 Action cancelled 5 No access 6 No access controller inhibit 20 20% working 40 40% working 60 60% working 80 80% working Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

• Page 810
  • All entries in the logbook of the inverter are deleted. • In the logbook, information on the error history is saved. Logbook C00002/22 0: Off / ready Reserved Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 811
  From version 06.00.00 Password protection  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 812
  (Lenze setting printed in bold) 0 Wiring has changed This display appears if the FB interconnection has been changed in the application level using the FB Editor. Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 813
  • For setting the V/f characteristic, only the rated frequency (C00089) and the rated voltage (C00090) of the motor have to be entered. V/f control Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 814
  14 Terminals 11 assignment is included in the description of the respective technology application in the «Terminal 16 Terminal 16 assignment of the control modes». Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 815
  I/O level: «Terminal 11» control mode 1016 Speed|Terminal16 Application: Actuating drive speed I/O level: «Terminal 16» control mode 1020 Speed|Keypad Application: Actuating drive speed I/O level: «Keypad» control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 816
  I/O level: «Terminals 0» control mode 3012 SwitchPos|Terminal 2 Application: Switch-off positioning I/O level: «Terminal 2» control mode 3014 SwitchPos|Terminal 11 Application: Switch-off positioning I/O level: «Terminal 11» control mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 817
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 60000 1500 rpm  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 818
  100.00 power-related (see table)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 819
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 60000 3 rpm  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 820
  655.35 power-related (see table)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 821
  0.00 % AIN2: Offset  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 822
  Display of the output value in percent of the analog input amplifier • 100 % ≡ 16384 ≡ +10 V / +20 mA Analog terminals Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 823
  (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00039/1 40.00 % Fixed setpoint 1 C00039/2 60.00 % Fixed setpoint 2 C00039/3 80.00 % Fixed setpoint 3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 824
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 1000  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 825
  • Estimated actual torque for all motor control modes.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 826
  Interior temperature of CU  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 827
  = 5FB9 Gain factor Vp of the speed controller for different motor control types Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 600.00 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 828
  SLVC: Vp torque controller  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 829
  500.00 power-related (see table)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 830
  -500 500 0 Hz  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 831
  650.00 power-related (see table)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 832
  5000 power-related (see table)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 833
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 100000.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 834
  Add. accel. time 1 … 15 C00101/… C00101/15  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 835
  Bit 5 Standstill depending on the actual speed Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 836
  0.000 999.000 999.000 s  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 837
  Function assignment of DI6 and DI7  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 838
  0.00 250.00 100.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 839
  Resistance value of the connected brake resistor • The value to be entered can be obtained from the nameplate of the brake resistor. • For each device type, the value is preset to the adapted minimum Lenze brake resistance. Setting range Lenze setting (min.
• Page 840
  Index: 24439 = 5F77 C00136 | Communication control words Control words of the communication interfaces Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 841
   Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT C00137 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 Index: 24438 = 5F76 C00137 | Device status Display of the current device status Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 842
  Bit 7 ResetFault Bit 8 SetHalt Bit 9 FirmwareUpdate Bit 10 MotorIdent Bit 11 SetMessage Bit 12 SetIMP Bit 13 SetSystemFail Bit 14 SetFail Bit 15 SetFailQSP Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 843
  Index: 24433 = 5F71 C00142 | Auto-start option Starting performance of the inverter after mains connection, undervoltage, loading of the Lenze setting as well as a reset of «Trouble» or «Fault» can be parameterised individually. Automatic restart after mains connection/fault…
• Page 844
  Status code bit 0 Bit 9 StatusCodeBit1 Status code bit 1 Bit 10 StatusCodeBit2 Status code bit 2 Bit 11 StatusCodeBit3 Status code bit 3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 845
  C00158 | Cause of controller inhibit Bit coded display of the cause/source of the controller inhibit Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 846
  Reserved Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 847
  Subject area + Id statuserror  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 848
  35 CAN2 input bit 12 36 CAN2 input bit 13 37 CAN2 input bit 14 38 CAN2 input bit 15 39 CAN3 input bit 0 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 849
  79 MCI word2 input bit8 80 MCI word2 input bit9 81 MCI word2 input bit10 82 MCI word2 input bit11 83 MCI Word 2 Input bit 12 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 850
  1 AIN1 2 CAN1 control word 3 CAN1 input word 2 4 CAN1 input word 3 5 CAN1 input word 4 6 CAN2 input word 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 851
  42 L_OffsetGainPar_2: Out 43 L_OffsetGainPar_3: Out 44 L_Aritmethik_1: Out 45 L_AnalogSwitch_1: Out 46 L_NSet_1: Out 47 L_MotorPoti_1: Out 48 L_PCTRL_1: Out 49 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out1 50 L_SignalMonitor_a: Out2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 852
  Data type: OCTET_STRING Index: 24408 = 5F58 C00167 | Logbook data This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 853
  C00171 | Logbook access index Index: 24404 = 5F54 This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 854
  Braking is performed by combining all three braking procedures.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 855
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 2147483647  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 856
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 600 3 s  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 857
  All «locking» error messages are reset automatically  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 858
  Logbook access index User  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 859
  User text • From version 12.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC-STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Character length: 32 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 860
  Display of the serial numbers of the individual device components Subcodes Info C00204/1 Serial no.: Control card C00204/2 Serial no.: Power section C00204/3 Serial no.: MCI module C00204/4 Reserved C00204/5 Serial no.: Memory module Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 861
  0.000 999.999 0.000 s  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 862
  -199.99 199.99 199.99 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 863
  199.99 % L_PCTRL_1: Neg. maximum  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 864
  0.00 100.00 0.50 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 865
  (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 866
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 5000 1000 ms  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 867
  40.0 1000.0 200.0 Hz  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 868
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 1000.0 1.0 ms  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 869
  Index: 24278 = 5ED6 C00297 | Counter Receive Error Isr This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 870
  Data type: UNSIGNED_16 Index: 24265 = 5EC9 C00310 | PartitionValue This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 871
  Data type: UNSIGNED_32 Index: 24255 = 5EBF C00320 | Debug information This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 872
  • From version 15.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 873
  • From version 15.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 874
  Bit 5  CAN2_In_Überw. Bit 6  CAN3_In_Überw. Bit 7  CAN4_In_Überw. From version 15.00.00 Bit 8  Reserved Bit 9  Reserved Bit 10  Reserved Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 875
  0x0000 CAN decoupling PDO_Out from the appl.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 876
  Info C00344/1 LP_CanOut1:wState DiscVal C00344/2 LP_CanOut1:wOut2 DiscVal C00344/3 LP_CanOut1:wOut3 DiscVal C00344/4 LP_CanOut1:wOut4 DiscVal C00344/5 LP_CanOut2:wOut1 DiscVal C00344/6 LP_CanOut2:wOut2 DiscVal C00344/7 LP_CanOut2:wOut3 DiscVal C00344/8 LP_CanOut2:wOut4 DiscVal Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 877
  Status node 1 … 15 C00347/… C00347/15  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 878
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 127 1  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 879
  • From version 15.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 880
  • From version 15.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 881
  Setting of the data length for TX PDOs »CAN on board» system bus Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 882
  Telegram counter CAN3_OUT C00360/6 Telegram counter SDO1 OUT C00360/7 Telegram counter SDO2 OUT C00360/8 Telegram counter CAN1_IN C00360/9 Telegram counter CAN2_IN C00360/10 Telegram counter CAN3_IN Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 883
  1 2 SDO Lenze  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 884
  I-1005 (see DS301 V4.02). »CAN on board» system bus Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0080 (decimal: 128) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 885
  Sync instant of reception  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 886
  CAN node address HeartBeat producer 1 … 15 C00385/… C00385/15  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 887
   Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 888
  • From version 15.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 889
  • From version 15.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 890
  Bit 6  Reserved Bit 7  Reserved  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 891
  Relay OFF delay C00423/3 0.000 s DO1 ON delay C00423/4 0.000 s DO1 OFF delay C00423/5 0.000 s DO2 ON delay C00423/6 0.000 s DO2 OFF delay Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 892
  100.00 % O2I: Gain  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 893
  O1I: Current C00437/2 O2I: Current  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 894
  Configuration defining the events that lead to a decoupling of the analog output terminals. Configuring exception handling of the output terminals Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 895
  Bit coded display of the level of the digital inputs Digital input terminals Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded: Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 896
  Bit coded display of the level of the digital outputs Digital output terminals Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded: Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 897
  Index: 24129 = 5E41 From version 02.00.00 Display of the frequency input signals which are fed into the application. Using DI1(6) and DI2(7) as frequency inputs Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 898
  • Bit set = HIGH level Configuring exception handling of the output terminals Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 899
  56.002 Keypad: Display bar  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 900
   Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 C00462 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_16 Index: 24113 = 5E31 C00462 | Remote: Control From version 06.00.00 PC manual control Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 901
  This parameter serves to control the functions of the Motion Control Kernel for PC manual control. Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x00000000 0xFFFFFFFF Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 902
  Lenze setting Info C00463/1 0x00000000 Remote: MCK control  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 903
  Data type: INTEGER_32 Index: 24107 = 5E2B C00468 | Service code This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 904
  Value for output wPar1 … wPar32 C00471/… C00471/32  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 905
  C00474 | LS_ParFree_p SB LS_ParFree_p: Setting of the position signals to be output Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 Incr. 2147483647 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 906
  Value for output nC476_16_a  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 907
  Values for output dnC479_1 … dnC479_8 C00479/… C00479/8  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 908
  Input values nDis1_a … nDis8_a C00482/… C00482/8  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 909
  Application unit 4: Display factor  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 910
  • Selection of edge or level for starting slow-down function 1 C00488/2 0: Level InputSens.Stop1 • Selection of edge or level for stop function 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 911
  DI6/DI7 (connection of 4-track HTL encoders)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 912
  C00505/2 Binding ID C00505/3 Password  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC-STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Character length: 16 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 913
  Bit 0 Only access to user menu 1 ≡The menus in the keypad are reduced. Only the user menu can be used to change parameters. Password protection Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 914
  The diagnostics interface X6 cannot be used to read write/read parameters. Bit 3 Reserved Bit 4 Reserved Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 915
  C00509/1 0x0006 PW protection config X1 (CAN)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 916
  • If «0.000» is set, no entry will be displayed in the user menu. Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 16000.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00517/1 51.000 C00051: Display of actual speed value Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 917
  C00560 Parameter | Name: Data type: UNSIGNED_8 Index: 24015 = 5DCF C00560 | Fan switching status Display of the function status of the device fans Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 918
  Current monitoring: Delay time overload  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 919
  Response for overcurrent detection and clamp operation  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 920
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 100 100 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 921
  (min. value | unit | max. value) 6200.0 20.0 ms  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 922
  LS_SetError_2: Resp. to bSetError4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 923
  1 Fault 5 Warning  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 924
  Response to an event in the case of monitoring via heartbeat protocol  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 925
  Response if error bit 14 in the MCI control word is set.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 926
  6: Information MCK: direction conflict_Cw  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 927
  0.00 100.00 5.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 928
  1 Fault 5 Warning  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 929
  1 Fault 5 Warning  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 930
  Index: 23958 = 5D96 C00617 | 32-bit connection table AdditionalFBsHL This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 931
  Display of 16-bit signal 1 C00620/19 0: Not connected LS_DisFree: wDis2 Display of 16-bit signal 2 C00620/20 0: Not connected LS_DisFree: wDis3 Display of 16-bit signal 3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 932
  Display of analog signal 7 C00620/44 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_a: nDis8_a Display of analog signal 8 C00620/45 0: Not connected LS_DisFree: wDis5 Display of 16-bit signal 5 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 933
  Read/write request 5: Value (low word) C00620/69 0: Not connected LS_ParReadWrite_6: wParIndex Read/write request 6: Code C00620/70 0: Not connected LS_ParReadWrite_6: wParSubindex Read/write request 6: Subcode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 934
  CAN1 output: Status word bit 3 C00621/9 0: Not connected LP_CanOut1: bState_B4 CAN1 output: Status word bit 4 C00621/10 0: Not connected LP_CanOut1: bState_B5 CAN1 output: Status word bit 5 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 935
  0: Not connected LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B5 CAN2 output: Data word 1- bit 5 C00621/35 0: Not connected LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B6 CAN2 output: Data word 1- bit 6 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 936
  0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: bOut1_B14 CAN3 output: Data word 1- bit 14 C00621/60 0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: bOut1_B15 CAN3 output: Data word 1- bit 15 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 937
  0: Not connected LP_MciOut: bOut2_B7 MCI output: Data word 2 — bit 7 C00621/85 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: bOut2_B8 MCI output: Data word 2 — bit 8 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 938
  Display of digital signal 15 C00621/109 0: Not connected LS_DisFree_b: bDis16 Display of digital signal 16 C00621/111 0: Not connected LS_ParReadWrite_1: bExecute Read/write request 1: Trigger Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 939
  LS_TouchProbe: bDisableTPDigIn3_Rising TP input DI3: Disable recognition of rising edges dynamically C00621/153 0: Not connected LS_TouchProbe: bDisableTPDigIn3_Falling TP input DI3: Disable recognition of falling edges dynamically Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 940
  LP_CanOut4: bOut1_B7 C00621/192 0: Not connected LP_CanOut4: bOut1_B8 C00621/193 0: Not connected LP_CanOut4: bOut1_B9 C00621/194 0: Not connected LP_CanOut4: bOut1_B10 C00621/195 0: Not connected LP_CanOut4: bOut1_B11 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 941
  Retain data: 32-bit input value 1 C00622/17 0: Not connected LS_RetainData: dnIn2 Retain data: 32-bit input value 2 C00622/18 0: Not connected LS_RetainData: dnIn3 Retain data: 32-bit input value 3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 942
  • Selection of the maximum limit values for the blocking zones in which the speed must not be constant. Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 943
  1 ≡ Speed setpoint is at the minimum speed limit Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 944
  (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 945
  3 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * nIn2_a) / 100% 4 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * 1%) / |nIn2_a| 5 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * 100%) / (100% — nIn2_a) Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 946
  Data type: INTEGER_16 C00658 | PRBS amplitude Index: 23917 = 5D6D This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 947
  Fixed value 0 … 15 C00662/… C00662/16  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 948
  C00674/2 65536 L_OffsetGainPhiP_2: Gain  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 949
  C00679/2 10000 L_MulDiv_2: Denominator  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 950
  6 |In1| < |In2|  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 951
  0.00 100.00 0.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 952
  -199.99 199.99 0.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 953
  20013: LS_ParFree_a: nC472_4_a LA_NCtrl: nTorqueGenLim_a Input for maximum torque in generator mode C00700/5 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: nPIDVpAdapt_a Input for adapting the PID controller gain Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 954
  Input for user signal 4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 955
  Control input for deactivation of motor potentiometer C00701/18 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bMPOTUp Control input for motor potentiometer ramp-up C00701/19 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bMPOTDown Control input for motor potentiometer ramp-down Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 956
  Input for binary user signal 3 C00701/44 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bFreeIn4 Input for binary user signal 4 C00701/45 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bFreeIn5 Input for binary user signal 5 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 957
  C00710/8 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: wMckCtrl2 Input for MCK control word 2 C00710/9 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: wMckOperationMode Input for selection of MCK operating mode Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 958
  Input for selecting the target position in [units], High- Word  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 959
  Control input for activation of speed override C00711/19 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bEnableAccOverride Control input for activation of acceleration override C00711/20 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bHomeStartStop Control input for start/stop homing Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 960
  0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bMckOperationMode_1 Control input for MCK operating mode changeover value C00711/42 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bMckOperationMode_2 Control input for MCK operating mode changeover value Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 961
  Input for 32-bit user signal 2  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 962
  0.000 s L_DigitalDelay_3: OFF delay  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 963
  Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00727/1 1 ≡ request quick stop C00727/2 1 ≡ request DC-injection braking Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 964
  Index: 23844 = 5D24 C00731 | Oscilloscope recording length This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 965
  Index: 23831 = 5D17 C00744 | Oscilloscope trigger mask This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 966
  • The selection list contains all 16 bit output signals which can be assigned to the 16 bit inputs displayed by the subcodes. Selection list selection list — analog signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 967
  Input for user signal 4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 968
  0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlSlowDown3 Control input for selection of pre-switch off 3 C00761/19 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlStop3 Control input for stop function 3 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 969
  Input for binary user signal 4 C00761/44 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bFreeIn5 Input for binary user signal 5 C00761/45 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bFreeIn6 Input for binary user signal 6 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 970
  -199.99 199.99 -100.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 971
  1 Load lower limit 2 Load 0  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 972
  Data type: INTEGER_16 C00809 | L_NLim_2: Max.SkipFrq. Index: 23766 = 5CD6 FB L_NLim_2: Maximum skip frequencies Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 973
  Data type: UNSIGNED_16 Index: 23763 = 5CD3 C00812 | L_NLim: Current status From version 11.00.00 Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 974
  Selection list 0 False 1 True Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00821/1 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1: bOut: bIn3…bIn1=0 0 0 C00821/2 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1: bOut: bIn3…bIn1=0 0 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 975
  Index: 23752 = 5CC8 C00823 | L_DigitalLogic_2: Truth table L_DigitalLogic_2 FB: Parameterisation of the truth table Selection list 0 False 1 True Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 976
  = 5CC6 C00825 | L_DigitalLogic5_1: Truth table FB L_DigitalLogic5_1: Parameter setting of the truth table Selection list 0 False 1 True Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 977
  The truth table parameterised in C00827 is used.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 978
  L_DigitalLogic5_2: bIn5…bIn1=1 1 1 1 1  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 979
  L_DigitalLogic_3: bOut3: bIn3…bIn1=0 0 0 C00829/18 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3: bOut3: bIn3…bIn1=0 0 1 C00829/19 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3: bOut3: bIn3…bIn1=0 1 0 C00829/20 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3: bOut3: bIn3…bIn1=0 1 1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 980
  MCTRL: nSpeedLowLimit_a C00830/24 MCTRL: nSpeedCtrlI_a C00830/25 MCTRL: nSpeedCtrlPAdapt_a C00830/26 MCTRL: nBoost_a C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00830/28 MCTRL: nTorqueGenLimit_a C00830/29 MCTRL: nTorqueMotLimit_a C00830/31 MCTRL: nVoltageAdd_a C00830/32 MCTRL: nPWMAngleOffset_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 981
  MCK: nSpeedSetValue_a C00830/73 MCK: wMotionCtrl2 C00830/74 MCK: wMotionCtrl1 C00830/75 MCK: nSpeedOverride_a C00830/76 MCK: nAccOverride_a C00830/77 MCK: nSpeedAdd_v C00830/78 MCK: wAuxCtrl C00830/79 MCK: wSMCtrl C00830/80 L_OffsetGainP_3: nIn_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 982
  L_OffsetGain_1: nIn_a C00831/6 L_OffsetGain_1: nOffset_a C00831/7 L_OffsetGain_1: nGain_a C00831/8 L_Negation_1: nIn_a C00831/9 L_GainOffset_1: nIn_a C00831/10 L_GainOffset_1: nGain_a C00831/11 L_GainOffset_1: nOffset_a C00831/12 L_Arithmetik_1: nIn1_a C00831/13 L_Arithmetik_1: nIn2_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 983
  L_GainOffset_2: nGain_a C00831/55 L_GainOffset_2: nOffset_a C00831/56 L_OffsetGainP_1: nIn_a C00831/57 L_OffsetGainP_2: nIn_a C00831/58 L_OffsetGain_2: nIn_a C00831/59 L_OffsetGain_2: nOffset_a C00831/60 L_OffsetGain_2: nGain_a C00831/61 L_PCTRL_1: nAct_a C00831/62 L_PCTRL_1: nAdapt_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 984
  Display of 16-bit input values of different blocks in [rpm] • Non-listed subcodes are «reserved». Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) -32767 Incr./ms 32767 Subcodes Info Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 985
  DCTRL: wCCMControl C00832/39 L_NLim_1: nIn_a C00832/41 L_Compare_2: nIn1_a C00832/42 L_Compare_2: nIn2_a C00832/43 L_Compare_3: nIn1_a C00832/44 L_Compare_3: nIn2_a C00832/45 L_AnalogSwitch_2: nIn1_a C00832/46 L_AnalogSwitch_2: nIn2_a C00832/47 L_AnalogSwitch_3: nIn1_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 986
  LS_DataAccess: wIn2 (Lenze-internal) C00832/85 LS_DataAccess: wIn3 (Lenze-internal) C00832/86 LS_DataAccess: wIn4 (Lenze-internal) C00832/87 L_PT1_1: nIn_a C00832/88 MCTRL: nSpeedHighLimit_a C00832/89 L_PCTRL_1: nNSet_a C00832/90 L_PCTRL_1: nISet_a C00832/91 L_Interpolator_1: nPhdIn_v Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 987
  L_NSet_1: bTi2 C00833/23 L_NSet_1: bTi4 C00833/24 L_NSet_1: bTi8 C00833/25 L_NSet_1: bLoad C00833/26 L_NSet_1: bExternalCINH C00833/27 MCTRL: bPosCtrlOn C00833/28 MCTRL: bSpeedInterpolatorOn C00833/29 MCTRL: bTorqueInterpolatorOn C00833/30 MCTRL: bTorquemodeOn Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 988
  L_DigitalDelay_1: bIn C00833/67 MCTRL: bPosDerivativeOn C00833/68 MCTRL: bMotorRefOffsetOn C00833/69 MCTRL: bSpeedCtrlPAdaptOn C00833/70 L_AnalogSwitch_2: bSet C00833/71 L_AnalogSwitch_3: bSet C00833/72 L_MPot_1: bUp C00833/73 L_MPot_1: bInAct C00833/74 L_MPot_1: bDown Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 989
  LS_SetError_2: bSetError2 C00833/109 LS_SetError_2: bSetError3 C00833/110 LS_SetError_2: bSetError4 C00833/111 L_JogCtrlExtension_1: bInputSel1 C00833/112 L_JogCtrlExtension_1: bInputSel2 C00833/113 L_JogCtrlExtension_1: bRfgIn C00833/114 L_JogCtrlExtension_1: bJog1In C00833/115 L_JogCtrlExtension_1: bJog2In C00833/116 L_JogCtrlExtension_1: bSlowDown1 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 990
  Display in percent of 16-bit input values of different blocks • Non-listed subcodes are «reserved». Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99 Subcodes Info C00835/1 L_Absolut_2: nIn_a C00835/2 L_AnalogSwitch_4: nIn1_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 991
  L_Counter_1: wCmpVal C00835/39 L_GainOffsetP_1: nIn_a C00835/40 L_GainOffsetP_2: nIn_a C00835/41 L_GainOffsetP_3: nIn_a C00835/42 L_Limit_1: nIn_a C00835/43 L_Limit_2: nIn_a C00835/44 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wOperationMode C00835/45 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wPosMode C00835/46 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wProfileNo Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 992
  L_SRFG_2: nSet_a C00835/83 L_SignalSwitch_1: wIn1 C00835/84 L_SignalSwitch_2: wIn1 C00835/85 L_SignalSwitch_3: wIn1 C00835/86 L_SignalSwitch_4: wIn1 C00835/87 L_SignalSwitch_1: wIn2 C00835/88 L_SignalSwitch_2: wIn2 C00835/89 L_SignalSwitch_3: wIn2 C00835/90 L_SignalSwitch_4: wIn2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 993
  L_ConvX_1: wDenom C00835/127 L_ConvX_2: nIn_a C00835/128 L_ConvX_2: nNum C00835/129 L_ConvX_2: wDenom C00835/130 L_ConvX_3: nIn_a C00835/131 L_ConvX_3: nNum C00835/132 L_ConvX_3: wDenom C00835/133 L_ConvPP_1: nNum C00835/134 L_ConvPP_1: wDenom Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 994
  L_Counter_2: wLdVal C00836/17 L_Counter_2: wCmpVal C00836/18 L_Counter_3: wLdVal C00836/19 L_Counter_3: wCmpVal C00836/20 L_PhaseIntK_1: nIn_v C00836/21 L_Negation_2: nIn_a C00836/22 L_NLim_2: nIn_a C00836/23 L_OffsetGain_3: nIn_a C00836/24 L_OffsetGain_3: nOffset_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 995
  L_ConvWordsToDInt_2: wInLWord C00836/61 L_ConvWordsToDInt_2: wInHWord C00836/62 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3: wInLWord C00836/63 L_ConvWordsToDInt_3: wInHWord C00836/64 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1: wInLWord C00836/65 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_1: wInHWord C00836/66 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2: wInLWord C00836/67 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_2: wInHWord C00836/68 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3: wInLWord Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 996
  L_ProcessCtrl_1: nInfluence_a C00836/105 L_PhiIntegrator_1: nIn_v C00836/106 L_PhiIntegrator_1: wGearNum C00836/107 L_PhiIntegrator_1: wGearDenom C00836/108 L_SwitchPoint_1: nActSpeed_v C00836/109 L_PhiIntegrator_1: nSpeedAdd_v C00836/110 L_DFSET_1: nSpeedTrim_v C00836/111 L_DFSET_1: nSpeedTrim_a C00836/112 L_DFSET_1: wGearNum Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 997
  (min. value | unit | max. value) -32767 Incr./ms 32767 Subcodes Info C00837/1 L_Absolut_2: nIn_a C00837/2 L_AnalogSwitch_4: nIn1_a C00837/3 L_AnalogSwitch_4: nIn2_a C00837/4 L_AnalogSwitch_5: nIn1_a C00837/5 L_AnalogSwitch_5: nIn2_a C00837/6 L_Compare_4: nIn1_a Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 998
  L_Limit_1: nIn_a C00837/43 L_Limit_2: nIn_a C00837/44 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wOperationMode C00837/45 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wPosMode C00837/46 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wProfileNo C00837/47 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wInMckPosCtrl_1 C00837/48 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wInMckPosCtrl_2 C00837/49 L_MckStateInterface_1: wInMckPosState_1 C00837/50 L_MckStateInterface_1: wInMckPosState_2 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 999
  L_SignalSwitch_4: wIn1 C00837/87 L_SignalSwitch_1: wIn2 C00837/88 L_SignalSwitch_2: wIn2 C00837/89 L_SignalSwitch_3: wIn2 C00837/90 L_SignalSwitch_4: wIn2 C00837/91 L_Odometer_1: nInSpeed_v C00837/92 L_CalcDiameter_1: wDMax C00837/93 L_CalcDiameter_1: wDMin C00837/94 L_CalcDiameter_1: wVMax Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…
• Page 1000
  C00837/131 L_ConvX_3: nNum C00837/132 L_ConvX_3: wDenom C00837/133 L_ConvPP_1: nNum C00837/134 L_ConvPP_1: wDenom C00837/135 L_ConvPP_2: nNum C00837/136 L_ConvPP_2: wDenom C00837/137 L_ConvPP_3: nNum C00837/138 L_ConvPP_3: wDenom 1000 Lenze · 8400 HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 12.0 EN · 06/2017 · TD23…

Преобразователи частоты 8400 (0,25 — 22 кВт)

Инверторные приводы 8400 — в точном соответствии с Вашими требованиями, в диапазоне 0,25 — 15 кВт.

• 150% перегрузка по току (60с)
• температура эксплуатации 45С без снижения мощности (макс. 55С)
• степень защиты IP20
• модуль памяти для быстрого ввода в эксплуатацию
• диагностический разъем L-force; для диагностики и параметризации, даже во время работы установки
• интегрированный фильтр радиочастотных помех
• пластина для подключения экрана кабеля управления
• автоматическая идентификация двигателя
• наличие защит от короткого замыкания, замыкания на землю и обрыва двигателя

Inverter Drives 8400 BaseLine D

Inverter in enclosure IP20, 0,25 — 2.2 kW

• 1 phase connection 100 — 264 V +/- 0%,

built-in unit with RFI filte

Название	Цена	Количество
E84AVBDE2512SX0 0,25 kW; 1,7 A
E84AVBDE3712SX0 0,37 kW; 2,4 A
E84AVBDE5512SX0 0,55 kW; 3,0 A
E84AVBDE7512SX0 0,75 kW; 4,0 A
E84AVBDE1122SX0 1,1 kW; 5,5 A
E84AVBDE1522SX0 1,5 kW; 7,0 A
E84AVBDE2222SX0 2,2 kW; 9,5 A

Inverter Drives 8400 BaseLine D

Inverter in enclosure IP20, 0.37 — 3.0 kW

• 3-phase connection 320 — 550 V +/- 0%

built-in unit with RFI filte

Inverter Drives 8400 StateLine & HighLine

Inverter in enclosure IP20, 0.25 — 2.2 kW

• 1 phase connection 100 — 264 V +/- 0%,

Название	Цена	Количество
E84AVxCx2512 0,25 kW; 1,7 A E84AVSCE2512
E84AVxCx2512 0,25 kW; 1,7 A E84AVHCE2512
E84AVxCx3712 0,37 kW; 2,4 A E84AVSCE3712
E84AVxCx3712 0,37 kW; 2,4 A E84AVHCE3712
E84AVxCx5512 0,55 kW; 3,0 A E84AVSCE5512
E84AVxCx5512 0,55 kW; 3,0 A E84AVHCE5512
E84AVxCx7512 0,75 kW; 4,0 A E84AVSCE7512
E84AVxCx7512 0,75 kW; 4,0 A E84AVHCE7512
E84AVxCx1122 1,1 kW; 5,5 A E84AVSCE1122
E84AVxCx1122 1,1 kW; 5,5 A E84AVHCE1122
E84AVxCx1522 1,5 kW; 7,0 A E84AVSCE1522
E84AVxCx1522 1,5 kW; 7,0 A E84AVHCE1522
E84AVxCx2222 2,2 kW; 9,5 A E84AVSCE2222
E84AVxCx2222 2,2 kW; 9,5 A E84AVHCE2222

Inverter Drives 8400 StateLine & HighLine

Inverter in enclosure IP20, 0.37 — 5.5 kW

• 3-phase connection 320 — 550 V +/- 0%

Further accessories

Документация (скачать)

Телефон
: +7 (495) 984-51-05, +7 (812) 640-46-90, E-mail:
info@matrixgroup.su, Время работы:
9-18.

Инструкции 

LENZE 4800 4900 Инструкция

Размер файла: 1.72 мб

Руководство по эксплуатации LENZE 4800 4900

Скачать

Lenze 4800 4900 руководство

Размер файла: 426.50 кб

Руководство по монтажу LENZE 4800 4900

Скачать

lenze 9300 vector инструкция

Размер файла: 657.32 кб

Руководство пользователя Lenze 9300 vector

Скачать

Lenze 9400 инструкция

Размер файла: 7.36 мб

Руководство пользователя lenze 9400 англ.

Скачать